Chromium Code Reviews| OLD | NEW |
|---|---|
| (Empty) | |
| 1 =============================== | |
| 2 Contents Of PNaCl Bitcode Files | |
| 3 =============================== | |
| 4 | |
| 5 .. contents:: | |
| 6 :local: | |
| 7 :backlinks: none | |
| 8 :depth: 3 | |
| 9 | |
| 10 | |
| 11 Introduction | |
| 12 ============ | |
| 13 | |
| 14 This document is a reference manual for the contents of PNaCl bitcode files. We | |
| 15 define bitcode files via three layers. The first layer is presented using | |
| 16 assembly language *PNaClAsm*, and defines the textual form of the bitcode | |
| 17 file. The textual form is then lowered to a sequence of :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 18 records<link_for_pnacl_records>`. The final layer applies abbreviations that | |
| 19 convert each PNaCl record into a corresponding sequence of bits. | |
| 20 | |
| 21 .. image:: /images/PNaClBitcodeFlow.png | |
| 22 | |
| 23 PNaClAsm uses a *static single assignment* (SSA) based representation that | |
| 24 requires generated results to have a single (assignment) source. | |
| 25 | |
| 26 PNaClAsm focuses on the semantic content of the file, not the bit-encoding of | |
| 27 that content. However, it does provide annotations that allow one to specify how | |
| 28 the :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` are used to convert | |
| 29 PNaCl records into the sequence of bits. | |
| 30 | |
| 31 Each construct in PNaClAsm defines a corresponding :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 32 record<link_for_pnacl_records>`. A PNaCl bitcode file is simply a sequence of | |
| 33 PNaCl records. The goal of PNaClAsm is to make records easier to read, and not | |
| 34 to define a high-level user programming language. | |
| 35 | |
| 36 PNaCl records are an abstract encoding of structured data, similar to XML. Like | |
| 37 XML, A PNaCl record has a notion of a tag (i.e. the first element in a record, | |
| 38 called a *code*). PNaCl records can be nested. Nesting is defined by a | |
| 39 corresponding :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` and | |
| 40 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` block record. | |
| 41 | |
| 42 These block records must be used like balanced parentheses to define the block | |
| 43 structure that is imposed on top of records. Each exit record must be preceded | |
| 44 by a corresponding enter record. Blocks can be nested by nesting enter/exit | |
| 45 records appropriately. | |
| 46 | |
| 47 The *PNaCl bitcode writer* takes the sequence of records, defined by a PNaClAsm | |
| 48 program, and converts each record into a (variable-length) sequence of bits. The | |
| 49 output of each bit sequence is appended together. The resulting generated | |
| 50 sequence of bits is the contents of the PNaCl bitcode file. | |
| 51 | |
| 52 For every kind of record, there is a method for converting records into bit | |
| 53 sequences. These methods correspond to a notion of | |
| 54 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`. Each abbreviation defines | |
| 55 a specific bit sequence conversion to be applied. | |
| 56 | |
| 57 Abbreviations can be user defined, but there are also predefined defaults. All | |
| 58 user-specified abbreviations are included in the generated bitcode | |
| 59 file. Predefined defaults are not. | |
| 60 | |
| 61 Each abbreviation defines how a record is converted to a bit sequence. The | |
| 62 :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` uses these abbreviations | |
| 63 to convert the bit sequence back to the corresponding sequence of PNaCl records. | |
| 64 As a result, all records have an abbreviation (user or default) associated with | |
| 65 them. | |
| 66 | |
| 67 Conceptually, abbreviations are used to define how to pack the contents of | |
| 68 records into bit sequences. The main reason for defining abbreviations is to | |
| 69 save space. The default abbreviations are simplistic and are intended to handle | |
| 70 all possible records. The default abbreviations do not really worry about being | |
| 71 efficient, in terms of the number of bits generated. | |
| 72 | |
| 73 By separating the concepts of PNaCl records and abbreviations, the notion of | |
| 74 data compression is cleanly separated from semantic content. This allows | |
| 75 different use cases to decide how much effort should be spent on compressing | |
| 76 records. | |
| 77 | |
| 78 For a JIT compiler that produces bitcode, little (if any) compression should be | |
| 79 applied. In fact, the API to the JIT may just be the records themselves. The | |
| 80 goal of a JIT is to perform the final translation to machine code as quickly as | |
| 81 possible. | |
| 82 | |
| 83 On the other hand, when delivering across the web, one may want to compress the | |
| 84 sequence of bits considerably, to reduce costs in delivering web pages. Note | |
| 85 that :ref:`pnacl-compress<pnacl_compress>` is provided as part of the SDK to do | |
| 86 this job. | |
| 87 | |
| 88 Data Model | |
| 89 ========== | |
| 90 | |
| 91 The data model for PNaCl bitcode is fixed at little-endian ILP32: pointers are | |
| 92 32 bits in size. 64-bit integer types are also supported natively via the i64 | |
| 93 type (for example, a front-end can generate these from the C/C++ type ``long | |
| 94 long``). | |
| 95 | |
| 96 Integers are assumed to be modeled using two's complement. Floating point | |
| 97 support is fixed at :ref:`IEEE 754<c_cpp_floating_point>` 32-bit and 64-bit | |
| 98 values (float and double, respectively). | |
| 99 | |
| 100 PNaCl Blocks | |
| 101 ============ | |
| 102 | |
| 103 Blocks are used to organize records in the bitcode file. The kinds of blocks | |
| 104 defined in PNaClAsm are: | |
| 105 | |
| 106 Module block | |
| 107 A top-level block defining the program. The :ref:`module | |
| 108 block<link_for_module_block>` defines global information used by the program, | |
| 109 followed by function blocks defining the implementation of functions within | |
| 110 the program. All other blocks (listed below) must appear within a module | |
| 111 block. | |
| 112 | |
| 113 Types block | |
| 114 The :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>` defines the set of types | |
| 115 used by the program. All types used in the program must be defined in the | |
| 116 types block. These types consist of primitive types as well as high level | |
| 117 constructs such as vectors and function signatures. | |
| 118 | |
| 119 Globals block | |
| 120 The :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>` defines the set of | |
| 121 global addresses of global variables and constants used by the program. It | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"global addresses of global variables" - is the fi
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Yes. All global variables and addresses must appea
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/19 21:12:00
Per our offline discussion, I think we both agree
| |
| 122 also defines how each global (associated with the global address) is | |
| 123 initialized. | |
| 124 | |
| 125 Valuesymtab block | |
| 126 The :ref:`valuesymtab block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>` defines | |
| 127 textual names for external function addresses. | |
| 128 | |
| 129 Function block | |
| 130 Each function (implemented) in a program has its own :ref:`function | |
| 131 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` that defines the implementation of | |
| 132 the corresponding function. | |
| 133 | |
| 134 Constants block | |
| 135 Each implemented function that uses constants in its instructions defines a | |
| 136 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`. Constants blocks | |
| 137 appear within the corresponding function block of the implemented function. | |
| 138 | |
| 139 Abbreviations block | |
| 140 Defines global abbreviations that are used to compress PNaCl records. The | |
| 141 :ref:`abbreviations block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` is segmented | |
| 142 into multiple sections, one section for each kind of block. This block appears | |
| 143 at the beginning of the module block. | |
| 144 | |
| 145 This section is only intended as a high-level discussion of blocks. Later | |
| 146 sections will dive more deeply into the constraints on how blocks must be laid | |
| 147 out. This section only presents the overall concepts of what kinds of data are | |
| 148 stored in each of the blocks. | |
| 149 | |
| 150 A PNaCl program consists of a :ref:`header | |
| 151 record<link_for_header_record_section>` and a :ref:`module | |
| 152 block<link_for_module_block>`. The header record defines a sequence of bytes | |
| 153 uniquely identifying the file as a bitcode file. The module block defines the | |
| 154 program to run. | |
| 155 | |
| 156 Each block, within a bitcode file, defines values. These values are associated | |
| 157 with IDs. Each type of block defines different kinds of IDs. The | |
| 158 :ref:`module<link_for_module_block>`, | |
| 159 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>`, | |
| 160 :ref:`globals<link_for_globals_block_section>`, and | |
| 161 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` blocks define global | |
| 162 identifiers, and only a single instance can appear. The | |
| 163 :ref:`function<link_for_function_blocks_section>` and | |
| 164 :ref:`constant<link_for_constants_block_section>` blocks define local | |
| 165 identifiers, and can have multiple instances (one for each implemented | |
| 166 function). | |
| 167 | |
| 168 The only records in the module block that define values, are :ref:`function | |
| 169 address<link_for_function_address_section>` records. Each function address | |
| 170 record defines a different function address, and the :ref:`type | |
| 171 signature<link_for_function_type>` associated with that function address. | |
| 172 | |
| 173 Each :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` defines the | |
| 174 implementation of a single function. Each function block defines the | |
| 175 intermediate representation of the function, consisting of basic blocks and | |
| 176 instructions. If constants are used within instructions, they are defined in a | |
| 177 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`, nested within the | |
| 178 corresponding function block. | |
| 179 | |
| 180 All function blocks are associated with a corresponding function address. This | |
| 181 association is positional rather than explicit. That is, the Nth function block | |
| 182 in a module block corresponds to the Nth | |
| 183 :ref:`defining<link_for_function_address_section>` (rather than declared) | |
| 184 function address record in the module block. | |
| 185 | |
| 186 Hence, within a function block, there is no explicit reference to the function | |
| 187 address the block defines. For readability, PNaClAsm uses the corresponding | |
| 188 function signature, associated with the corresponding function address record, | |
| 189 even though that data does not appear in the corresponding records. | |
| 190 | |
| 191 .. _link_for_pnacl_records: | |
| 192 | |
| 193 PNaCl Records | |
| 194 ============= | |
| 195 | |
| 196 A PNaCl record is a non-empty sequence of unsigned, 64-bit, integers. A record | |
| 197 is identified by the record *code*, which is the first element in the | |
| 198 sequence. Record codes are unique within a specific kind of block, but are not | |
| 199 necessarily unique across different kinds of blocks. The record code acts as the | |
| 200 variant discriminator (i.e. tag) within a block, to identify what kind of record | |
| 201 it is. | |
| 202 | |
| 203 Record codes that are local to a specific kind of block are small values | |
| 204 (starting from zero). In an ideal world, they would be a consecutive sequence of | |
| 205 integers, starting at zero. However, the reality is that PNaCl records evolved | |
| 206 over time (and actually started as `LLVM records | |
| 207 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_). For backward compatibility, | |
| 208 obsolete numbers have not been reused, leaving gaps in the actual record code | |
| 209 values used. | |
| 210 | |
| 211 Global record codes are record codes that have the same meaning in multiple | |
| 212 kinds of blocks. To separate global record codes from local record codes, large | |
| 213 values are used. Currently there are four :ref:`global record | |
| 214 codes<link_for_global_record_codes>`. To make these cases clear, and to leave | |
| 215 ample room for future growth in PNaClAsm, these special records have record | |
| 216 codes close to the value 2\ :sup:`16`\ . Note: Well-formed PNaCl bitcode files | |
| 217 do not have record codes >= 2\ :sup:`16`\ . | |
| 218 | |
| 219 A PNaCl record is denoted as follows: :: | |
| 220 | |
| 221 a: <v0, v1, ... , vN> | |
| 222 | |
| 223 The value ``v0`` is the record code. The remaining values, ``v1`` through | |
| 224 ``vN``, are parameters that fill in additional information needed by the | |
| 225 construct it represents. All records must have a record code. Hence, empty PNaCl | |
| 226 records are not allowed. ``a`` is the index to the abbreviation used to convert | |
| 227 the record to a bit sequence. | |
| 228 | |
| 229 While most records (for a given record code) have the same length, it is not | |
| 230 true of all record codes. Some record codes can have arbitrary length. In | |
| 231 particular, function type signatures, call instructions, phi nodes, switch | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
phi instructions? (instead of nodes)
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
| 232 instructions, and global variable initialization records all have variable | |
| 233 length. The expected length is predefined and part of the PNaClAsm language. See | |
| 234 the corresponding construct (associated with the record) to determine the | |
| 235 expected length. | |
| 236 | |
| 237 The ``PNaCl bitstream writer``, which converts records to bit sequences, does | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
The `` `` formatting doesn't look right in the htm
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
| 238 this by writing out the abbreviation index used to encode the record, followed | |
| 239 by the contents of the record. The details of this are left to the section on | |
| 240 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`. However, at the record | |
| 241 level, one important aspect of this appears in ::ref:`block | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
::ref: ==> :ref:
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 242 enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` records. These records must define | |
| 243 how many bits are required to hold abbreviation indices associated with records | |
| 244 of that block. | |
| 245 | |
| 246 .. _link_for_default_abbreviations: | |
| 247 | |
| 248 Default Abbreviations | |
| 249 ===================== | |
| 250 | |
| 251 There are 4 predefined (default) abbreviation indices, used as the default | |
| 252 abbreviations for PNaCl records. They are: | |
| 253 | |
| 254 0 | |
| 255 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode an exit block | |
| 256 record. | |
| 257 | |
| 258 1 | |
| 259 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode an enter block | |
| 260 record. | |
| 261 | |
| 262 2 | |
| 263 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode a user-defined | |
| 264 abbreviation. Note: User defined abbreviations are also encoded as records, | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"User defined" ==> "User-defined"
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 265 and hence need an abbreviation index to bit-encode them. | |
| 266 | |
| 267 3 | |
| 268 Abbreviation index for the default abbreviation to bit-encode all other | |
| 269 records in the bitcode file. | |
| 270 | |
| 271 A block may, in addition, define a list of block specific, user-defined, | |
| 272 abbreviations (of length ``U``). The number of bits ``B`` specified for an enter | |
| 273 record must be sufficiently large such that:: | |
| 274 | |
| 275 2**B >= U + 4 | |
| 276 | |
| 277 In addition, the upper limit for ``B`` is ``16``. | |
| 278 | |
| 279 PNaClAsm requires specifying the number of bits needed to read abbreviations as | |
| 280 part of the enter block record. This allows the PNaCl bitcode reader/writer to | |
| 281 use the specified number of bits to encode abbreviation indices. | |
| 282 | |
| 283 PNaCl Identifiers | |
| 284 ================= | |
| 285 | |
| 286 A program is defined by a :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`. Blocks can | |
| 287 be nested within other blocks, including the module block. Each block defines a | |
| 288 sequence of records. | |
| 289 | |
| 290 Most of the records, within a block, also define unique values. Each unique | |
| 291 value is given a corresponding unique identifier (i.e. *ID*). In PNaClAsm, each | |
| 292 kind of block defines its own kind of identifiers. The names of these | |
| 293 identifiers are defined by concatenating a prefix character (``'@'`` or | |
| 294 ``'%'``), the kind of block (a single character), and a suffix index. The suffix | |
| 295 index is defined by the positional location of the defined value within the | |
| 296 records of the corresponding block. The indices are all zero based, meaning that | |
| 297 the first defined value (within a block) is defined using index 0. | |
| 298 | |
| 299 Identifiers are categorized into two types, *local* and *global*. Local | |
| 300 identifiers are identifiers that are associated with the implementation of a | |
| 301 single function. In that sense, they are local to the block they appear in. | |
| 302 | |
| 303 All other identifiers are global, and can appear in multiple blocks. This split | |
| 304 is intentional. Global identifiers are used by multiple functions, and therefore | |
| 305 must be known in all function implementations. Local identifiers only apply to a | |
| 306 single function, and can be reused between functions. The :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 307 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` uses this separation to parallelize the | |
| 308 compilation of functions. | |
| 309 | |
| 310 Note that local abbreviation identifiers are unique to the block they appear | |
| 311 in. Global abbreviation identifiers are only unique to the block type they are | |
| 312 defined for. Different block types can reuse global abbreviation identifiers. | |
| 313 | |
| 314 Global identifiers use the prefix character ``'@'`` while local identifiers use | |
| 315 the prefix character ``'%'``. | |
| 316 | |
| 317 Note that by using positional location to define identifiers (within a block), | |
| 318 the values defined in PNaCl bitcode files need not be explicitly included in the | |
| 319 bitcode file. Rather, they are inferred by the (ordered) position of the record | |
| 320 in the block. This is also intentional. It is used to reduce the amount of data | |
| 321 that must be (explicitly) passed to the :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 322 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>`, and downloaded from the cloud. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"the cloud"? yuck...
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
How about simply "when downloaded into Chrome".
| |
| 323 | |
| 324 In general, most of the records within blocks are assumed to be topologically | |
| 325 sorted, putting value definitions before their uses. This implies that records | |
| 326 do not need to encode data if they can deduce the corresponding information from | |
| 327 their uses. | |
| 328 | |
| 329 The most common use of this is that many instructions use the type of their | |
| 330 operands to determine the type of the instruction. Again, this is | |
| 331 intentional. It allows less information to be stored. | |
| 332 | |
| 333 However, for function blocks (which define instructions), a topological sort may | |
| 334 not exist. Loop carried value dependencies simply do not allow topologically | |
| 335 sorting. To deal with this, function blocks have a notion of (instruction value) | |
| 336 :ref:`forward type | |
| 337 declarations<link_for_forward_type_declaration_section>`. These declarations | |
| 338 must appear before any of the uses of that value, if the (instruction) value is | |
| 339 defined later in the function than its first use. | |
| 340 | |
| 341 The kinds of identifiers used in PNaClAsm are: | |
| 342 | |
| 343 @a | |
| 344 Global abbreviation identifier. | |
| 345 | |
| 346 %a | |
| 347 Local abbreviation identifier. | |
| 348 | |
| 349 %b | |
| 350 Function basic block identifier. | |
| 351 | |
| 352 %c | |
| 353 Function constant identifier. | |
| 354 | |
| 355 @f | |
| 356 Global function address identifier. | |
| 357 | |
| 358 @g | |
| 359 Global variable/constant address identifier. | |
| 360 | |
| 361 %p | |
| 362 Function parameter identifier. | |
| 363 | |
| 364 @t | |
| 365 Global type identifier. | |
| 366 | |
| 367 %v | |
| 368 Value generated by an instruction in a function block. | |
| 369 | |
| 370 | |
| 371 Conventions For Describing Records | |
| 372 ================================== | |
| 373 | |
| 374 PNaClAsm is the textual representation of :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 375 records<link_for_pnacl_records>`. Each PNaCl record is described by a | |
| 376 corresponding PNaClAsm construct. These constructs are described using syntax | |
| 377 rules, and semantics on how they are converted to records. Along with the rules, | |
| 378 is a notion of :ref:`global state<link_for_global_state_section>`. The global | |
| 379 state is updated by syntax rules. The purpose of the global state is to track | |
| 380 positional dependencies between records. | |
| 381 | |
| 382 For each PNaCl construct, we define multiple subsections. The **Syntax** | |
| 383 subsection defines a syntax rule for the construct. The **Record** subsection | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
I think most instances of "subsection" can be chan
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 384 defines the corresponding record associated with the syntax rule. The | |
| 385 **Semantics** subsection describes the semantics associated with the record, in | |
| 386 terms of data within the global state and the corresponding syntax. It also | |
| 387 includes other high-level semantics, when appropriate. | |
| 388 | |
| 389 The **Constraints** subsection (if present) defines any constraints associated | |
| 390 with the construct, including the global state. The **Updates** subsection (if | |
| 391 present) defines how the global state is updated when the construct is | |
| 392 processed. The **Examples** subsection gives one or more examples of using the | |
| 393 corresponding PNaClAsm construct. | |
| 394 | |
| 395 Some semantics subsections use functions to compute values. The meaning of | |
| 396 functions can be found in :ref:`support | |
| 397 functions<link_for_support_functions_section>`. | |
| 398 | |
| 399 The syntax rule may include the | |
| 400 :ref:`abbreviation<link_for_abbreviations_section>` to use, when converting to a | |
| 401 bit-sequence. These abbreviations, if allowed, are at the end of the construct, | |
| 402 and enclosed in ``<`` and ``>`` brackets. These abbreviations are optional in | |
| 403 the syntax, and can be omitted. If they are used, the abbreviation brackets are | |
| 404 part of the actual syntax of the construct. If the abbreviation is omitted, the | |
| 405 default abbreviation index is used. To make it clear that abbreviations are | |
| 406 optional, syntax rules separate abbreviations using plenty of whitespace. | |
| 407 | |
| 408 Within a syntax rule, lowercase characters are literal values. Sequences of | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"lower case" for consistency with other uses, incl
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 409 upper case alphanumeric characters are named values. If we mix lower and upper | |
| 410 case letters within a name appearing in a syntax rule, the lower case letters | |
| 411 are literal while the upper case sequence of alphanumeric characters denote rule | |
| 412 specific values. The valid values for each of these names will be defined in | |
| 413 the corresponding semantics and constraints subsections. | |
| 414 | |
| 415 For example, consider the following syntax rule:: | |
| 416 | |
| 417 %vN = add T O1, O2; <A> | |
| 418 | |
| 419 This rule defines a PNaClAsm add instruction. This construct defines an | |
| 420 instruction that adds two values (``O1`` and ``O2``) to generate instruction | |
| 421 value ``%vN``. The types of the arguments, and the result, are all of type | |
| 422 ``T``. If abbreviation ID ``A`` is present, the record is encoded using that | |
| 423 abbreviation. Otherwise the corresponding default abbreviation (3) is used. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Can you briefly where the "3" comes from? E.g.
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Replaces with reference to "default abbreviation i
| |
| 424 | |
| 425 To be concrete, the syntactic rule above defines the structure of the following | |
| 426 PNaClAsm examples:: | |
| 427 | |
| 428 %v10 = add i32 %v1, %v2; <@a5> | |
| 429 %v11 = add i32 %v10, %v3; | |
| 430 | |
| 431 In addition to specifying the syntax, each syntax rule can also also specify the | |
| 432 contents of the corresponding record in the corresponding record subsection. In | |
| 433 simple cases, the elements of the corresponding record are predefined (literal) | |
| 434 constants. Otherwise the record element is an identifier from another subsection | |
| 435 associated with the construct. | |
| 436 | |
| 437 Factorial Example | |
| 438 ================= | |
| 439 | |
| 440 This section provides a simple example of a PNaCl bitcode file. Its contents | |
| 441 describe a bitcode file that only defines a function to compute the factorial | |
| 442 value of a number. | |
| 443 | |
| 444 In C, the factorial function can be defined as:: | |
| 445 | |
| 446 int fact(int n) { | |
| 447 if (n == 1) return 1; | |
| 448 return n * fact(n-1); | |
| 449 } | |
| 450 | |
| 451 Compiling this into a PNaCl bitcode file, and dumping out its contents with | |
| 452 utility :ref:`pnacl-bcdis<pnacl-bcdis>`, the corresponding output is:: | |
| 453 | |
| 454 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
| 455 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
| 456 | 0> | | |
| 457 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
| 458 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
| 459 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
| 460 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 461 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 462 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 463 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 464 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 465 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0> | @t2 = i32 (i32); | |
| 466 59:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t3 = i1; | |
| 467 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 468 64:0| 3: <8, 2, 0, 0, 0> | define external i32 @f0(i32); | |
| 469 68:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 470 76:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
| 471 78:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 472 80:0| 1: <65535, 14, 2> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
| 473 88:0| 3: <1, 0, 102, 97, 99, | @f0 : "fact"; | |
| 474 | 116> | | |
| 475 96:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 476 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 477 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 478 108:0| 3: <1, 3> | blocks 3; | |
| 479 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 480 120:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 481 122:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
| 482 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 483 | | %b0: | |
| 484 128:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 32> | %v0 = icmp eq i32 %p0, %c0; | |
| 485 132:6| 3: <11, 1, 2, 1> | br i1 %v0, label %b1, label %b2; | |
| 486 | | %b1: | |
| 487 136:6| 3: <10, 2> | ret i32 %c0; | |
| 488 | | %b2: | |
| 489 139:2| 3: <2, 3, 2, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %p0, %c0; | |
| 490 143:2| 3: <34, 0, 5, 1> | %v2 = call i32 @f0(i32 %v1); | |
| 491 148:0| 3: <2, 5, 1, 2> | %v3 = mul i32 %p0, %v2; | |
| 492 152:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v3; | |
| 493 154:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 494 156:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 495 | |
| 496 Note that there are three columns in this output. The first column contains the | |
| 497 bit positions of the records within the bitcode file. The second column contains | |
| 498 the sequence of records within the bitcode file. The third column contains the | |
| 499 corresponding PNaClAsm program. | |
| 500 | |
| 501 Bit positions are defined by a pair ``B:N``. ``B`` is the number of bytes, while | |
| 502 ``N`` is the bit offset within the ``B``-th byte. Hence, the bit position (in | |
| 503 bits) is:: | |
| 504 | |
| 505 B*8 + N | |
| 506 | |
| 507 Hence, the first record is at bit offset ``0`` (``0*8+0``). The second record is | |
| 508 at bit offset ``128`` (``16*8+0``). The third record is at bit offset ``192`` | |
| 509 (``24*8+0``). The fourth record is at bit offset ``212`` (``26*8+4``). | |
| 510 | |
| 511 The :ref:`header record<link_for_header_record_section>` is a sequence of 16 | |
| 512 bytes, defining the contents of the first 16 bytes of the bitcode file. These | |
| 513 bytes never change, and are expected for all version 2, PNaCl bitcode files. The | |
| 514 first four bytes define the magic number of the file, i.e. 'PEXE'. All PEXE | |
| 515 bitcode files begin with these four bytes. | |
| 516 | |
| 517 All but the header record has an abbreviation index associated with it. Since no | |
| 518 user-defined abbreviations are provided, all records were converted to | |
| 519 bit sequences using default abbreviations. | |
| 520 | |
| 521 The types block (starting at bit address ``40:0``), defines 4 types: ``i1``, | |
| 522 ``i32``, ``void``, and function signature ``i32 (i32)``. | |
| 523 | |
| 524 Bit address ``64:0`` declares the factorial function address ``@f0``, and its | |
| 525 corresponding type signature. Bit address ``88:0`` associates the name ``fact`` | |
| 526 with function address ``@f0``. | |
| 527 | |
| 528 Bit address ``100:0`` defines the function block that implements function | |
| 529 ``fact``. The entry point is ``%b0`` (at bit address ``128:0``). It uses the | |
| 530 32-bit integer constant ``1`` (defined at bit addresses ``122:4``). Bit address | |
| 531 ``128:0`` defines an equality comparison of the argument ``%p0`` with ``1`` | |
| 532 (constant ``%c0``). Bit address ``132:6`` defines a conditional branch. If the | |
| 533 result of the previous comparison (``%v0``) is true, the program will branch to | |
| 534 block ``%b1``. Otherwise it will branch to block ``%b2``. | |
| 535 | |
| 536 Bit address ``136:6`` returns constant ``1`` (``%c0``) when the input parameter | |
| 537 is 1. Instructions between bit address ``139:2`` and ``154:4`` compute and | |
| 538 return ``n * fact(n-1)``. | |
| 539 | |
| 540 Road Map | |
| 541 ======== | |
| 542 | |
| 543 At this point, this document transitions from basic concepts to the details | |
| 544 of how records should be formatted. This section defines the road map to | |
| 545 the remaining sections in this document. | |
| 546 | |
| 547 Many records have implicit information associated with them, and must be | |
| 548 maintained across records. :ref:`Global state<link_for_global_state_section>` | |
| 549 describes how this implicit information is modeled. In addition, there are | |
| 550 various :ref:`support functions<link_for_support_functions_section>` that are | |
| 551 used to define the semantics of records, and how they update the global state. | |
| 552 | |
| 553 There are just a handful of global records (records that either don't appear in | |
| 554 any block, or can appear in all blocks). :ref:`Global | |
| 555 records<link_for_global_record_codes>` describes these records. This includes | |
| 556 the block delimiter records :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` | |
| 557 and :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` that define block | |
| 558 boundaries. | |
| 559 | |
| 560 PNaClAsm is a strongly typed language, and most block values are typed. | |
| 561 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>` describes the set of legal types, and | |
| 562 how to define types. | |
| 563 | |
| 564 Global variables and their initializers are presented in the :ref:`globals | |
| 565 block<link_for_globals_block_section>`. :ref:`Function | |
| 566 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>` are part of the :ref:`module | |
| 567 block<link_for_module_block>`, but must be defined before any global variables. | |
| 568 | |
| 569 Names to be associated with global variables and function addresses, are defined | |
| 570 in the :ref:`valuesymtab block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and must | |
| 571 appear after the :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>`, but | |
| 572 before any :ref:`function definition<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
| 573 | |
| 574 The :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>` is the top-most block, and all | |
| 575 other blocks must appear within the module block. The module block defines the | |
| 576 executable in the bitcode file. | |
| 577 | |
| 578 Constants used within a :ref:`function | |
| 579 definition<link_for_function_blocks_section>` must be defined using a | |
| 580 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`. Each function | |
| 581 definition is defined by a :ref:`function | |
| 582 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` and constant blocks can only appear | |
| 583 within function blocks. Constants defined within a constant block can only be | |
| 584 used in the enclosing function block. | |
| 585 | |
| 586 Function definitions are defined by a sequence of instructions. There are | |
| 587 several types of instructions. | |
| 588 | |
| 589 A :ref:`terminator instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` is the | |
| 590 last instruction in a :ref:`basic block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and | |
| 591 is a branch/return instruction. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
What about unreachable? That's kind of distinct f
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 592 | |
| 593 There are :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and | |
| 594 :ref:`floating point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary | |
| 595 operations. Integer binary instructions include both arithmetic and logical | |
| 596 operations. Floating point instructions define arithmetic operations. | |
| 597 | |
| 598 There are also :ref:`memory | |
| 599 access<link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions>` instructions that | |
| 600 allow one to load and store values. That section also includes how to define | |
| 601 local variables using the :ref:`alloca | |
| 602 instruction<link_for_alloca_instruction>`. | |
| 603 | |
| 604 One can also convert integer and floating point values using :ref:`conversion | |
| 605 instructions<link_for_conversion_instructions>`. | |
| 606 | |
| 607 :ref:`Comparison instructions<link_for_compare_instructions>` | |
| 608 allow you to compare values. | |
| 609 | |
| 610 :ref:`Vector instructions<link_for_vector_instructions>` allow you to build and | |
| 611 update vectors. Corresponding :ref:`intrinsic | |
| 612 functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, as well as | |
| 613 :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and :ref:`floating | |
| 614 point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary instructions allow | |
| 615 you to apply operations to vectors. | |
| 616 | |
| 617 In addition, :ref:`other instructions<link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions>` are | |
| 618 available. This includes function and procedure calls. | |
| 619 | |
| 620 There are also :ref:`memory | |
| 621 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` issues that should be | |
| 622 considered for global and local variables, as well as load and store | |
| 623 instructions. | |
| 624 | |
| 625 Finally, how to pack records is described in the | |
| 626 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` section. | |
| 627 | |
| 628 .. _link_for_global_state_section: | |
| 629 | |
| 630 Global State | |
| 631 ============ | |
| 632 | |
| 633 This section describes the global state associated with PNaClAsm. It is used to | |
| 634 define contextual data that is carried between records. | |
| 635 | |
| 636 In particular, PNaClAsm is a strongly typed language, and hence, we must track | |
| 637 the type associated with values. Subsection :ref:`link_to_typing_functions` | |
| 638 describes the functions used to maintain typing information associated with | |
| 639 values. | |
| 640 | |
| 641 Values are implicitly ordered within a block, and the indices associated with | |
| 642 the values do not appear in records. Rather, ID counters are used to figure out | |
| 643 what corresponding ID name is associated with a value generating record. | |
| 644 Subsection :ref:`link_to_ID_Counters` defines counters maintained in the global | |
| 645 state. | |
| 646 | |
| 647 In several blocks, one of the first records in the block defines how many values | |
| 648 are defined in in the block. The main purpose of these counts is to communicate | |
| 649 to the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` space requirements, or | |
| 650 a limit so that it can detect bad references to values. Subsection | |
| 651 :ref:`link_for_Size_Variables` defines variables that hold size definitions in | |
| 652 the corresponding records. | |
| 653 | |
| 654 Finally, the function and constants block contain implicit context between | |
| 655 records in those blocks. Subsection :ref:`link_to_Other_Variables` defines the | |
| 656 variables that contain this implicit context. | |
| 657 | |
| 658 .. _link_to_typing_functions: | |
| 659 | |
| 660 Typing Functions | |
| 661 ---------------- | |
| 662 | |
| 663 Associated with most identifiers is a type. This type defines what type the | |
| 664 corresponding value has. It is defined by the (initially empty) map:: | |
| 665 | |
| 666 TypeOf: ID -> Type | |
| 667 | |
| 668 For each type in the :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>`, a | |
| 669 corresponding inverse map:: | |
| 670 | |
| 671 TypeID: Type -> ID | |
| 672 | |
| 673 is maintained to convert syntactic types to the corresponding type ID. | |
| 674 | |
| 675 Note: This document assumes that map ``TypeID`` is automatically maintained | |
| 676 during updates to map ``TypeOf`` (when given a type ``ID``). Hence, *Updates* | |
| 677 subsections will not contain assignments to this map. | |
| 678 | |
| 679 Associated with each function identifier is its :ref:`type | |
| 680 signature<link_for_function_type>`. This is different than the type of the | |
| 681 function identifier, since function identifiers represent the function address | |
| 682 which is a pointer (and pointers are always implemented as a 32-bit integer | |
| 683 following the ILP32 data model). | |
| 684 | |
| 685 Function type signatures are maintained using:: | |
| 686 | |
| 687 TypeOfFcn: ID -> Type | |
| 688 | |
| 689 In addition, if a function address has an implementing block, there is a | |
| 690 corresponding implementation associated with the function address. To indicate | |
| 691 which function addresses have implementations, we use the set:: | |
| 692 | |
| 693 DefiningFcnIDs: set(ID) | |
| 694 | |
| 695 .. _link_to_ID_Counters: | |
| 696 | |
| 697 ID Counters | |
| 698 ----------- | |
| 699 | |
| 700 Each block defines one or more kinds of values. Value indices are generated | |
| 701 sequentially, starting at zero. To capture this, the following counters are | |
| 702 defined: | |
| 703 | |
| 704 NumTypes | |
| 705 The number of types defined so far (in the :ref:`types | |
| 706 block<link_for_types_block_section>`). | |
| 707 | |
| 708 NumFuncAddresses | |
| 709 The number of function addresses defined so far (in the :ref:`module | |
| 710 block<link_for_module_block>`). | |
| 711 | |
| 712 NumGlobalAddresses | |
| 713 The number of global variable/constant addresses defined so far (in the | |
| 714 :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>`). | |
| 715 | |
| 716 NumParams | |
| 717 The number of parameters defined for a function. Note: Unlike other counters, | |
| 718 this value is set once, at the beginning of the corresponding :ref:`function | |
| 719 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, based on the type signature | |
| 720 associated with the function. | |
| 721 | |
| 722 NumFcnConsts | |
| 723 The number of constants defined in a function so far (in the corresponding | |
| 724 nested :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`). | |
| 725 | |
| 726 NumBasicBlocks | |
| 727 The number of basic blocks defined so far (within a :ref:`function | |
| 728 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`). | |
| 729 | |
| 730 NumValuedInsts | |
| 731 The number of instructions, generating values, defined so far (within a | |
| 732 :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`). | |
| 733 | |
| 734 .. _link_for_Size_Variables: | |
| 735 | |
| 736 Size Variables | |
| 737 -------------- | |
| 738 | |
| 739 A number of blocks define expected sizes of constructs. These sizes are recorded | |
| 740 in the following size variables: | |
| 741 | |
| 742 ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
| 743 The expected :ref:`number of basic blocks<link_for_basic_blocks_count>` within | |
| 744 a function implementation. | |
| 745 | |
| 746 ExpectedTypes | |
| 747 The expected :ref:`number of types<link_for_types_count_record>` defined in | |
| 748 the types block. | |
| 749 | |
| 750 ExpectedGlobals | |
| 751 The expected :ref:`number of global variable/constant | |
| 752 addresses<link_for_globals_count_record>` in the globals block. | |
| 753 | |
| 754 ExpectedInitializers | |
| 755 The expected :ref:`number of initializers<link_for_compound_initializer>` for | |
| 756 a global variable/constant address in the globals block. | |
| 757 | |
| 758 It is assumed that the corresponding :ref:`ID counters<link_to_ID_counters>` are | |
| 759 always smaller than the corresponding size variables (except | |
| 760 ExpectedInitializers). That is: | |
| 761 | |
| 762 NumBasicBlocks < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Maybe this paragraph should have some special form
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Oops, I forgot the "::" after "That is". Fixing.
| |
| 763 NumTypes < ExpectedTypes | |
| 764 NumGlobalAddresses < ExpectedGlobals | |
| 765 | |
| 766 .. _link_to_Other_Variables: | |
| 767 | |
| 768 Other Variables | |
| 769 --------------- | |
| 770 | |
| 771 EnclosingFcnID | |
| 772 The function ID of the function block being processed. | |
| 773 | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Remove this blank line for consistency
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Actually, the consistent form is to leave a blank
| |
| 774 ConstantsSetType | |
| 775 | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Remove this blank line
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
| 776 Holds the type associated with the last :ref:`set type | |
| 777 record<link_for_constants_set_type_record>` in the constants block. Note: at | |
| 778 the beginning of each constants block, this variable is set to type void. | |
| 779 | |
| 780 .. _link_for_global_record_codes: | |
| 781 | |
| 782 Global Records | |
| 783 ============== | |
| 784 | |
| 785 Global records are records that can appear in any block. These records have | |
| 786 the same meaning in multiple kinds of blocks. | |
| 787 | |
| 788 There are four global PNaCl records, each having its own record code. These | |
| 789 global records are: | |
| 790 | |
| 791 Header | |
| 792 The :ref:`header record<link_for_header_record_section>` is the first record | |
| 793 of a PNaCl bitcode file, and identifies the file's magic number, as well as | |
| 794 the bitcode version it uses. The record defines the sequence of bytes that | |
| 795 make up the header and uniquely identifies the file as a PNaCl bitcode file. | |
| 796 | |
| 797 Enter | |
| 798 An :ref:`enter record<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` defines the | |
| 799 beginning of a block. Since blocks can be nested, one can appear inside other | |
| 800 blocks, as well as at the top level. | |
| 801 | |
| 802 Exit | |
| 803 An :ref:`exit record<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` defines the end of a | |
| 804 block. Hence, it must appear in every block, to end the block. | |
| 805 | |
| 806 Abbreviation | |
| 807 An :ref:`abbreviation record<link_for_abbreviation_record>` defines a | |
| 808 user-defined abbreviation to be applied to records within blocks. | |
| 809 Abbreviation records appearing in the abbreviations block define global | |
| 810 abbreviations. All other abbreviations are local to the block they appear in, | |
| 811 and can only be used in that block. | |
| 812 | |
| 813 All global records can't have user-defined abbreviations associated with | |
| 814 them. The :ref:`default abbreviation<link_for_default_abbreviations>` is always | |
| 815 used. | |
| 816 | |
| 817 .. _link_for_header_record_section: | |
| 818 | |
| 819 Header Record | |
| 820 ------------- | |
| 821 | |
| 822 The header record must be the first record in the file. It is the only record in | |
| 823 the bitcode file that doesn't have a corresponding construct in PNaClAsm. In | |
| 824 addition, no abbreviation index is associated with it. | |
| 825 | |
| 826 **Syntax**: | |
| 827 | |
| 828 There is no syntax for header records in PNaClAsm. | |
| 829 | |
| 830 **Record**:: | |
| 831 | |
| 832 <65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0, 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, 0> | |
| 833 | |
| 834 **Semantics**: | |
| 835 | |
| 836 The header record defines the initial sequence of bytes that must appear at the | |
| 837 beginning of all (PNaCl bitcode version 2) files. That sequence is the list of | |
| 838 bytes inside the record (excluding the record code). As such, it uniquely | |
| 839 identifies all PNaCl bitcode files. | |
| 840 | |
| 841 **Examples**:: | |
| 842 | |
| 843 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
| 844 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
| 845 | 0> | | |
| 846 | |
| 847 .. _link_for_enter_block_record_section: | |
| 848 | |
| 849 Enter Block Record | |
| 850 ------------------ | |
| 851 | |
| 852 Block records can be top-level, as well as nested in other blocks. Blocks must | |
| 853 begin with an *enter* record, and end with an | |
| 854 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` record. | |
| 855 | |
| 856 **Syntax**:: | |
| 857 | |
| 858 N { <B> | |
| 859 | |
| 860 **Record**:: | |
| 861 | |
| 862 1: <65535, ID, B> | |
| 863 | |
| 864 **Semantics**: | |
| 865 | |
| 866 Enter block records define the beginning of a block. ``B``, if present, is the | |
| 867 number of bits needed to represent all possible abbreviation indices used within | |
| 868 the block. If omitted, ``B=2`` is assumed. | |
| 869 | |
| 870 The block ``ID`` value is dependent on the name ``N``. Valid names and correspon ding | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
Find all 80-char violations:
grep -n '^.\{81\}'
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
| 871 ``BlockID`` values are defined as follows: | |
| 872 | |
| 873 ============= ======== | |
| 874 N Block ID | |
| 875 ============= ======== | |
| 876 abbreviations 0 | |
| 877 constants 11 | |
| 878 function 12 | |
| 879 globals 19 | |
| 880 module 8 | |
| 881 types 17 | |
| 882 valuesymtab 14 | |
| 883 ============= ======== | |
| 884 | |
| 885 Note: For readability, PNaClAsm defines a more readable form of a function block | |
| 886 enter record. See :ref:`function blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>` for | |
| 887 more details. | |
| 888 | |
| 889 **Examples**:: | |
| 890 | |
| 891 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
| 892 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
| 893 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
| 894 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 895 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 896 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
| 897 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
| 898 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
| 899 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 900 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
| 901 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 902 68:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
| 903 70:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 904 72:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 905 | |
| 906 .. _link_for_exit_block_record_section: | |
| 907 | |
| 908 Exit Block Record | |
| 909 ----------------- | |
| 910 | |
| 911 Block records can be top-level, as well as nested, records. Blocks must begin | |
| 912 with an :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` record, and end with a n | |
| 913 *exit* record. | |
| 914 | |
| 915 **Syntax**:: | |
| 916 | |
| 917 } | |
| 918 | |
| 919 **Record**:: | |
| 920 | |
| 921 0: <65534> | |
| 922 | |
| 923 **Semantics**: | |
| 924 | |
| 925 All exit records are identical, no matter what block they are ending. An exit | |
| 926 record defines the end of the block. | |
| 927 | |
| 928 **Examples**:: | |
| 929 | |
| 930 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
| 931 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
| 932 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
| 933 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 934 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 935 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
| 936 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
| 937 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
| 938 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 939 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
| 940 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 941 68:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
| 942 70:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 943 72:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 944 | |
| 945 .. _link_for_abbreviation_record: | |
| 946 | |
| 947 Abbreviation Record | |
| 948 ------------------- | |
| 949 | |
| 950 Abbreviation records define abbreviations. See | |
| 951 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` for details on how abbrevia tions should be | |
| 952 written. This section only presents the mechanical details for converting | |
| 953 an abbreviation into a PNaCl record. | |
| 954 | |
| 955 **Syntax**:: | |
| 956 | |
| 957 A = abbrev <E1, ... , EM>; | |
| 958 | |
| 959 **Record**:: | |
| 960 | |
| 961 2: <65533, M, EE1, ... , EEM> | |
| 962 | |
| 963 **Semantics**: | |
| 964 | |
| 965 Defines an abbreviation ``A`` as the sequence of encodings ``E1`` through | |
| 966 ``EM``. If the abbreviation appears within the :ref:`abbreviations | |
| 967 block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>`, ``A`` must be a global | |
| 968 abbreviation. Otherwise, ``A`` must be a local abbreviation. | |
| 969 | |
| 970 Abbreviations within a block (or a section within the abbreviations block), must | |
| 971 be enumerated in order, starting at index ``0``. | |
| 972 | |
| 973 Valid encodings ``Ei``, and the corresponding sequence of (unsigned) integers | |
| 974 ``EEi``, ( for ``1 <= i <= M``) are defined by the following table: | |
| 975 | |
| 976 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
| 977 Ei EEi Form | |
| 978 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
| 979 C 1, C Literal C in corresponding position in record. | |
| 980 fixed(N) 0, 1, N Encode value as a fixed sequence of N bits. | |
| 981 vbr(N) 0, 2, N Encode value using a variable bit rate of N. | |
| 982 char6 0, 4 Encode value as 6-bit char containing characters [a-zA-Z0-9._] . | |
| 983 array(EM) 0, 3 Allow zero or more of the enclosed encoding. | |
| 984 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
| 985 | |
| 986 Notationally, Array(EM) encloses the encoding EM, and must appear at the end of | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Should Array(EM) be formatted consistently with ``
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 987 the abbreviation. When encoding ``array(EM), array and EM`` are the last two | |
| 988 entries in an abbreviation, the trailing EM is omitted from the syntax, since it | |
| 989 is redundant. | |
| 990 | |
| 991 **Examples**:: | |
| 992 | |
| 993 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
| 994 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
| 995 | 0> | | |
| 996 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
| 997 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
| 998 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
| 999 36:0| 1: <1, 14> | valuesymtab: | |
| 1000 38:4| 2: <65533, 4, 0, 1, 3, 0,| @a0 = abbrev <fixed(3), vbr(8), | |
| 1001 | 2, 8, 0, 3, 0, 1, 8> | array(fixed(8))>; | |
| 1002 43:2| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <1, vbr(8), | |
| 1003 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 1, 7> | array(fixed(7))>; | |
| 1004 48:0| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <1, vbr(8), | |
| 1005 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 4> | array(char6)>; | |
| 1006 52:1| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a3 = abbrev <2, vbr(8), | |
| 1007 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 4> | array(char6)>; | |
| 1008 56:2| 1: <1, 11> | constants: | |
| 1009 58:6| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 1, 0, 1,| @a0 = abbrev <1, fixed(2)>; | |
| 1010 | 2> | | |
| 1011 61:7| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <4, vbr(8)>; | |
| 1012 | 8> | | |
| 1013 65:0| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 1, 0>| @a2 = abbrev <4, 0>; | |
| 1014 68:1| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 6, 0, 2,| @a3 = abbrev <6, vbr(8)>; | |
| 1015 | 8> | | |
| 1016 71:2| 1: <1, 12> | function: | |
| 1017 73:6| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 20, 0, | @a0 = abbrev <20, vbr(6), vbr(4), | |
| 1018 | 2, 6, 0, 2, 4, 0, 2, | vbr(4)>; | |
| 1019 | 4> | | |
| 1020 79:1| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <2, vbr(6), vbr(6), | |
| 1021 | 6, 0, 2, 6, 0, 1, 4> | fixed(4)>; | |
| 1022 84:4| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 3, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <3, vbr(6), | |
| 1023 | 6, 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 4> | fixed(2), fixed(4)>; | |
| 1024 89:7| 2: <65533, 1, 1, 10> | @a3 = abbrev <10>; | |
| 1025 91:7| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 10, 0, | @a4 = abbrev <10, vbr(6)>; | |
| 1026 | 2, 6> | | |
| 1027 95:0| 2: <65533, 1, 1, 15> | @a5 = abbrev <15>; | |
| 1028 97:0| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 43, 0, | @a6 = abbrev <43, vbr(6), | |
| 1029 | 2, 6, 0, 1, 2> | fixed(2)>; | |
| 1030 101:2| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 24, 0, | @a7 = abbrev <24, vbr(6), vbr(6), | |
| 1031 | 2, 6, 0, 2, 6, 0, 2, | vbr(4)>; | |
| 1032 | 4> | | |
| 1033 106:5| 1: <1, 19> | globals: | |
| 1034 109:1| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 0, 0, 2,| @a0 = abbrev <0, vbr(6), | |
| 1035 | 6, 0, 1, 1> | fixed(1)>; | |
| 1036 113:3| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <1, vbr(8)>; | |
| 1037 | 8> | | |
| 1038 116:4| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <2, vbr(8)>; | |
| 1039 | 8> | | |
| 1040 119:5| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 3, 0, 3,| @a3 = abbrev <3, array(fixed(8))> | |
| 1041 | 0, 1, 8> | ; | |
| 1042 123:2| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a4 = abbrev <4, vbr(6)>; | |
| 1043 | 6> | | |
| 1044 126:3| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a5 = abbrev <4, vbr(6), vbr(6)>; | |
| 1045 | 6, 0, 2, 6> | | |
| 1046 130:5| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1047 132:0| 1: <65535, 17, 3> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1048 140:0| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 21, 0, | %a0 = abbrev <21, fixed(1), | |
| 1049 | 1, 1, 0, 3, 0, 1, 2> | array(fixed(2))>; | |
| 1050 144:7| 3: <1, 3> | count 3; | |
| 1051 147:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1052 150:7| 4: <21, 0, 0, 0, 0> | @t1 = i32 (i32, i32); <%a0> | |
| 1053 152:7| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 1054 154:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1055 156:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 0, 0> | define external i32 @f0(i32, i32); | |
| 1056 160:6| 1: <65535, 19, 4> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1057 168:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
| 1058 170:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1059 172:0| 1: <65535, 14, 3> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
| 1060 180:0| 6: <1, 0, 102> | @f0 : "f"; <@a2> | |
| 1061 182:7| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1062 184:0| 1: <65535, 12, 4> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 1063 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 1064 192:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 1065 | | %b0: | |
| 1066 194:6| 5: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %p1; <@a1> | |
| 1067 197:2| 5: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v0; <@a1> | |
| 1068 199:6| 8: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; <@a4> | |
| 1069 201:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1070 204:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 1071 | |
| 1072 Note that the example above shows the standard abbreviations used by | |
| 1073 *pnacl-finalize*. | |
| 1074 | |
| 1075 .. _link_for_types_block_section: | |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 Types Block | |
| 1078 =========== | |
| 1079 | |
| 1080 The types block defines all types used in a program. It must appear in the | |
| 1081 :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`, before any :ref:`function | |
| 1082 address<link_for_function_address_section>` records, the :ref:`globals | |
| 1083 block<link_for_globals_block_section>`, the :ref:`valuesymtab | |
| 1084 block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and any :ref:`function | |
| 1085 blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
| 1086 | |
| 1087 All types used in a program must be defined in the types block. Many PNaClAsm | |
| 1088 constructs allow one to use explicit type names, rather than the type | |
| 1089 identifiers defined by this block. However, they are internally converted to the | |
| 1090 corresponding type identifier in the types block. Hence, the requirement that | |
| 1091 the types block must appear early in the module block. | |
| 1092 | |
| 1093 Each record in the types block defines a type used by the program. Types can be | |
| 1094 broken into the following groups: | |
| 1095 | |
| 1096 Primitive value types | |
| 1097 Defines the set of base types for values. This includes various sizes of | |
| 1098 integer and floating point types. | |
| 1099 | |
| 1100 Void type | |
| 1101 A primitive type that doesn't represent any value and has no size. | |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 Function types | |
| 1104 The type signatures of functions. | |
| 1105 | |
| 1106 Vector type | |
| 1107 Defines vectors of primitive types. | |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 In addition, any type that is not defined using another type is a primitive | |
| 1110 type. All other types (i.e. function and vector) are composite types. | |
| 1111 | |
| 1112 Types must be defined in a topological order, causing primitive types to appear | |
| 1113 before the composite types that use them. Each type must be unique. There are no | |
| 1114 additional restrictions on the order that types can be defined in a types block. | |
| 1115 | |
| 1116 The following subsections introduce each valid PNaClAsm type, and the | |
| 1117 corresponding PNaClAsm construct that defines the type. Types not defined in the | |
| 1118 types block, can't be used in a PNaCl program. | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 The first record of a types block must be a :ref:`count | |
| 1121 record<link_for_types_count_record>`, defining how many types are defined by the | |
| 1122 types block. All remaining records defines a type. The following subsections | |
| 1123 defines valid records within a types block. The order of type records is | |
| 1124 important. The position of each defining record implicitly defines the type ID | |
| 1125 that will be used to denote that type, within other PNaCl records of the bitcode | |
| 1126 file. | |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 To make this more concrete, consider the following example types block:: | |
| 1129 | |
| 1130 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1131 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 1132 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1133 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1134 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 1135 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (i32, float); | |
| 1136 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1137 | |
| 1138 This example defines a types block that defines four type IDs: | |
| 1139 | |
| 1140 @t0 | |
| 1141 A 32-bit integer type. | |
| 1142 @t1 | |
| 1143 A 32-bit floating point type. | |
| 1144 @t2 | |
| 1145 The void type. | |
| 1146 @t3 | |
| 1147 A function, taking 32-bit integer and float point arguments that returns | |
| 1148 void. | |
| 1149 | |
| 1150 .. _link_for_types_count_record: | |
| 1151 | |
| 1152 Count Record | |
| 1153 ------------ | |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 The *count record* defines how many types are defined in the types | |
| 1156 block. Following the types count record are records that define types used by | |
| 1157 the PNaCl program. | |
| 1158 | |
| 1159 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1160 | |
| 1161 count N; <A> | |
| 1162 | |
| 1163 **Record**:: | |
| 1164 | |
| 1165 AA: <1, N> | |
| 1166 | |
| 1167 **Semantics**: | |
| 1168 | |
| 1169 This construct defines the number of types used by the PNaCl program. ``N`` is | |
| 1170 the number of types defined in the types block. It is an error to define more | |
| 1171 (or fewer) types than value ``N``, within the enclosing types block. | |
| 1172 | |
| 1173 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1174 | |
| 1175 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1176 0 == NumTypes | |
| 1177 | |
| 1178 **Updates**: | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
::
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 1179 | |
| 1180 ExpectedTypes = N; | |
| 1181 | |
| 1182 **Examples**:: | |
| 1183 | |
| 1184 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1185 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 1186 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1187 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1188 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 1189 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (i32, float); | |
| 1190 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 Void Type | |
| 1193 --------- | |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 The *void* type record defines the void type, which corresponds to the type that | |
| 1196 doesn't define any value, and has no size. | |
| 1197 | |
| 1198 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1199 | |
| 1200 @tN = void; <A> | |
| 1201 | |
| 1202 **Record**:: | |
| 1203 | |
| 1204 AA: <2> | |
| 1205 | |
| 1206 **Semantics**: | |
| 1207 | |
| 1208 The void type record defines the type that has no values and has no size. | |
| 1209 | |
| 1210 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1211 | |
| 1212 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1213 N == NumTypes | |
| 1214 | |
| 1215 **Updates**:: | |
| 1216 | |
| 1217 ++NumTypes; | |
| 1218 TypeOf(@tN) = void; | |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 **Examples**:: | |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1223 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 1224 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1225 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1226 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 1227 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 Integer Types | |
| 1230 ------------- | |
| 1231 | |
| 1232 PNaClAsm allows integer types for various bit sizes. Valid bit sizes are 1, 8, | |
| 1233 16, 32, and 64. Integers can be signed or unsigned, but the signed component of | |
| 1234 an integer is not specified by the type. Rather, individual instructions | |
| 1235 determine whether the value is assumed to be signed or unsigned. | |
| 1236 | |
| 1237 It should be noted that in PNaClAsm, all pointers are implemented as 32-bit | |
| 1238 (unsigned) integers. There isn't a separate type for pointers. The only way to | |
| 1239 tell that a 32-bit integer is a pointer, is when it is used in an instruction | |
| 1240 that requires a pointer (such as load and store instructions). | |
| 1241 | |
| 1242 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1243 | |
| 1244 @tN = iB; <A> | |
| 1245 | |
| 1246 **Record**:: | |
| 1247 | |
| 1248 AA: <7, B> | |
| 1249 | |
| 1250 **Semantics**: | |
| 1251 | |
| 1252 An integer type record defines an integer type. ``B`` defines the number of bits | |
| 1253 of the integer type. | |
| 1254 | |
| 1255 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1256 | |
| 1257 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1258 N == NumTypes & | |
| 1259 B in {1, 8, 16, 32, 64} | |
| 1260 | |
| 1261 **Updates**:: | |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 ++NumTypes; | |
| 1264 TypeOf(@tN) = iB; | |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 **Examples**:: | |
| 1267 | |
| 1268 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1269 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 1270 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
| 1271 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
| 1272 56:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t2 = i8; | |
| 1273 58:6| 3: <7, 16> | @t3 = i16; | |
| 1274 61:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
| 1275 64:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t5 = i64 (i1); | |
| 1276 68:4| 3: <2> | @t6 = void; | |
| 1277 70:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1278 | |
| 1279 32-Bit Floating Point Type | |
| 1280 -------------------------- | |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 PNaClAsm allows computation on 32-bit floating point values. A floating point | |
| 1283 type record defines the 32-bit floating point type. | |
| 1284 | |
| 1285 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1286 | |
| 1287 @tN = float; <A> | |
| 1288 | |
| 1289 **Record**:: | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 AA: <3> | |
| 1292 | |
| 1293 **Semantics**: | |
| 1294 | |
| 1295 A floating point type record defines the 32-bit floating point type. | |
| 1296 | |
| 1297 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1298 | |
| 1299 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1300 N == NumTypes | |
| 1301 | |
| 1302 **Updates**:: | |
| 1303 | |
| 1304 ++NumTypes; | |
| 1305 TypeOf(@tN) = float; | |
| 1306 | |
| 1307 **Examples**:: | |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1310 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 1311 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
| 1312 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1313 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
| 1314 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 1315 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 64-bit Floating Point Type | |
| 1318 -------------------------- | |
| 1319 | |
| 1320 PNaClAsm allows computation on 64-bit floating point values. A 64-bit floating | |
| 1321 type record defines the 64-bit floating point type. | |
| 1322 | |
| 1323 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1324 | |
| 1325 @tN = double; <A> | |
| 1326 | |
| 1327 **Record**:: | |
| 1328 | |
| 1329 AA: <4> | |
| 1330 | |
| 1331 **Semantics**: | |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 A double type record defines the 64-bit floating point type. | |
| 1334 | |
| 1335 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1338 N == NumTypes | |
| 1339 | |
| 1340 **Updates**:: | |
| 1341 | |
| 1342 ++NumTypes; | |
| 1343 TypeOf(@tN) = double; | |
| 1344 | |
| 1345 **Examples**:: | |
| 1346 | |
| 1347 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1348 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 1349 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
| 1350 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1351 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
| 1352 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 1353 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1354 | |
| 1355 Vector Types | |
| 1356 ------------ | |
| 1357 | |
| 1358 A vector type is a derived type that represents a vector of elements. Vector | |
| 1359 types are used when multiple primitive data values are operated in parallel | |
| 1360 using a single (SIMD) :ref:`vector instruction<link_for_vector_instructions>`. A | |
| 1361 vector type requires a size (number of elements) and an underlying primitive | |
| 1362 data type. | |
| 1363 | |
| 1364 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1365 | |
| 1366 @tN = < E x T > <A> | |
| 1367 | |
| 1368 **Record**:: | |
| 1369 | |
| 1370 AA: <12, E, TT> | |
| 1371 | |
| 1372 **Semantics**: | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 The vector type defines a vector of elements. ``T`` is the type of each | |
| 1375 element. ``E`` is the number of elements in the vector. | |
| 1376 | |
| 1377 Vector types can only be defined on ``i1``, ``i8``, ``i16``, ``i32``, and | |
| 1378 ``float``. All vector types, except those on ``i1``, must contain exactly 128 | |
| 1379 bits. The valid element sizes are restricted as follows: | |
| 1380 | |
| 1381 ====== =================== | |
| 1382 Type Valid element sizes | |
| 1383 ====== =================== | |
| 1384 i1 4, 8, 16 | |
| 1385 i8 16 | |
| 1386 i16 8 | |
| 1387 i32 4 | |
| 1388 float 4 | |
| 1389 ====== =================== | |
| 1390 | |
| 1391 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1392 | |
| 1393 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1394 TT == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(T)) & | |
| 1395 N == NumTypes | |
| 1396 | |
| 1397 **Updates**:: | |
| 1398 | |
| 1399 ++NumTypes | |
| 1400 TypeOf(@tN) = <E x T> | |
| 1401 | |
| 1402 **Examples**:: | |
| 1403 | |
| 1404 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1405 48:0| 3: <1, 14> | count 14; | |
| 1406 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1407 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
| 1408 56:2| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 1409 58:0| 3: <12, 4, 1> | @t3 = <4 x i1>; | |
| 1410 61:2| 3: <12, 8, 1> | @t4 = <8 x i1>; | |
| 1411 64:4| 3: <12, 16, 1> | @t5 = <16 x i1>; | |
| 1412 67:6| 3: <7, 8> | @t6 = i8; | |
| 1413 70:2| 3: <12, 16, 6> | @t7 = <16 x i8>; | |
| 1414 73:4| 3: <7, 16> | @t8 = i16; | |
| 1415 76:0| 3: <12, 8, 8> | @t9 = <8 x i16>; | |
| 1416 79:2| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t10 = <4 x i32>; | |
| 1417 82:4| 3: <3> | @t11 = float; | |
| 1418 84:2| 3: <12, 4, 11> | @t12 = <4 x float>; | |
| 1419 87:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t13 = void (); | |
| 1420 90:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1421 | |
| 1422 .. _link_for_function_type: | |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 Function Type | |
| 1425 ------------- | |
| 1426 | |
| 1427 The *function* type can be thought of as a function signature. It consists of a | |
| 1428 return type, and a (possibly empty) list of formal parameter types. | |
| 1429 | |
| 1430 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1431 | |
| 1432 %tN = RT (T1, ... , TM) <A> | |
| 1433 | |
| 1434 **Record**:: | |
| 1435 | |
| 1436 AA: <21, 0, IRT, IT1, ... , ITM> | |
| 1437 | |
| 1438 **Semantics**: | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 The function type defines the signature of a function. ``RT`` is the return type | |
| 1441 of the function, while types ``T1`` through ``TM`` are the types of the | |
| 1442 arguments. Indices to the corresponding type identifiers are stored in the | |
| 1443 corresponding record. | |
| 1444 | |
| 1445 The return value must either be a primitive type, type ``void``, or a vector | |
| 1446 type. Parameter types can be a primitive or vector type. | |
| 1447 | |
| 1448 For ordinary functions, the only valid integer types that can be used for a | |
| 1449 return or parameter type are ``i32`` and ``i64``. All other integer types are | |
| 1450 not allowed. | |
| 1451 | |
| 1452 For :ref:`intrinsic functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, all | |
| 1453 integer types are allowed for both return and parameter types. | |
| 1454 | |
| 1455 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1456 | |
| 1457 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1458 M >= 0 & | |
| 1459 IRT == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(RT)) & | |
| 1460 IT1 == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(T1)) & | |
| 1461 ... | |
| 1462 ITM == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(TM)) & | |
| 1463 N == NumTypes | |
| 1464 | |
| 1465 **Updates**:: | |
| 1466 | |
| 1467 ++NumTypes | |
| 1468 TypeOf(@tN) = RT (T1, ... , TM) | |
| 1469 | |
| 1470 **Examples**:: | |
| 1471 | |
| 1472 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1473 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 1474 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 1475 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 1476 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
| 1477 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 1> | @t3 = double (float); | |
| 1478 61:2| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
| 1479 63:0| 3: <21, 0, 4> | @t5 = void (); | |
| 1480 66:2| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 2>| @t6 = | |
| 1481 | | i32 (i32, float, i32, double); | |
| 1482 72:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1483 | |
| 1484 .. _link_for_globals_block_section: | |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 Globals Block | |
| 1487 ============= | |
| 1488 | |
| 1489 The globals block defines global addresses of variables and constants, used by | |
| 1490 the PNaCl program. It also defines the memory associated with the global | |
| 1491 addresses, and how to initialize each global variable/constant. It must appear | |
| 1492 in the :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`. It must appear after the | |
| 1493 :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>`, as well as after all | |
| 1494 :ref:`function address<link_for_function_address_section>` records. But, it must | |
| 1495 also appear before the :ref:`valuesymtab | |
| 1496 block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and any | |
| 1497 :ref:`function blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
| 1498 | |
| 1499 The globals block begins with a :ref:`count | |
| 1500 record<link_for_globals_count_record>`, defining how many global addresses are | |
| 1501 defined by the PNaCl program. It is then followed by a sequence of records that | |
| 1502 defines each global address, and how each global address is initialized. | |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 The standard sequence, for defining global addresses, begins with a global | |
| 1505 address record. It is then followed by a sequence of records defining how the | |
| 1506 global address is initialized. If the initializer is simple, a single record is | |
| 1507 used. Otherwise, the initializer is preceded with a :ref:`compound | |
| 1508 record<link_for_compound_initializer>`, specifying a number *N*, followed by | |
| 1509 sequence of *N* simple initializer records. | |
| 1510 | |
| 1511 The size of the memory referenced by each global address is defined by its | |
| 1512 initializer records. All simple initializer records define a sequence of | |
| 1513 bytes. A compound initializer defines the sequence of bytes by concatenating the | |
| 1514 corresponding sequence of bytes for each of its simple initializer records. | |
| 1515 | |
| 1516 For notational convenience, PNaClAsm begins a compound record with a "{", and | |
| 1517 inserts a "}" after the last initializer record associated with the compound | |
| 1518 record. This latter "}" does not correspond to any record. It is implicitly | |
| 1519 assumed by the size specified in the compound record, and is added only to | |
| 1520 improve readability. | |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 Explicit alignment is specified for global addresses, and must be a power of | |
| 1523 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
| 1524 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
| 1525 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
| 1526 | |
| 1527 For example, consider the following pnacl-bcdis output snippet:: | |
| 1528 | |
| 1529 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1530 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1531 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
| 1532 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1533 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
| 1534 71:4| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
| 1535 74:0| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1536 78:6| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
| 1537 | | } | |
| 1538 81:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1539 | |
| 1540 This snippet defines the global constant ``@g0``, and the global variable | |
| 1541 ``@g1``. ``@g0`` is 8 bytes long, and initialized to zero. ``@g1`` is | |
| 1542 initialized with 6 bytes: ``1 2 3 4 0 0``. | |
| 1543 | |
| 1544 .. _link_for_globals_count_record: | |
| 1545 | |
| 1546 Count Record | |
| 1547 ------------ | |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 The count record defines the number of global addresses used by the PNaCl | |
| 1550 program. | |
| 1551 | |
| 1552 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1553 | |
| 1554 count N; <A> | |
| 1555 | |
| 1556 **Record**:: | |
| 1557 | |
| 1558 AA: <5, N> | |
| 1559 | |
| 1560 **Semantics**: | |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 This record must appear first in the globals block. The count record defines | |
| 1563 the number of global addresses used by the program. | |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1566 | |
| 1567 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
| 1568 | |
| 1569 **Updates**:: | |
| 1570 | |
| 1571 ExpectedGlobals = N; | |
| 1572 ExpectedInitializers = 0; | |
| 1573 | |
| 1574 **Examples**:: | |
| 1575 | |
| 1576 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1577 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1578 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
| 1579 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1580 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
| 1581 71:4| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
| 1582 74:0| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1583 78:6| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
| 1584 | | } | |
| 1585 81:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1586 | |
| 1587 .. _link_for_global_variable_address: | |
| 1588 | |
| 1589 Global Variable Addresses | |
| 1590 ------------------------- | |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 A global variable address record defines a global address to global data. The | |
| 1593 global variable address record must be immediately followed by initializer | |
| 1594 record(s) that define how the corresponding global variable is initialized. | |
| 1595 | |
| 1596 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1597 | |
| 1598 var @gN, align V, <A> | |
| 1599 | |
| 1600 **Record**:: | |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 AA: <0, VV, 0> | |
| 1603 | |
| 1604 **Semantics**: | |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 A global variable address record defines a global address for a global variable. | |
| 1607 ``V`` is the :ref:`memory | |
| 1608 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for the global variable | |
| 1609 address, and is a power of 2. | |
| 1610 | |
| 1611 It is assumed that the memory, referenced by the global variable address, can be | |
| 1612 both read and written to. | |
| 1613 | |
| 1614 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1615 | |
| 1616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1617 N == NumGlobalAddresses & | |
| 1618 ExpectedInitializers == 0 & | |
| 1619 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
| 1620 | |
| 1621 **Updates**:: | |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 ++NumGlobalAddresses; | |
| 1624 ExpectedInitializers = 1; | |
| 1625 TypeOf(@gN) = i32; | |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 **Examples**:: | |
| 1628 | |
| 1629 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1630 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1631 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g0, align 4, | |
| 1632 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1633 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
| 1634 71:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1635 76:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1636 80:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 1637 | |
| 1638 .. _link_for_global_constant_address: | |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 Global Constant Addresses | |
| 1641 ------------------------- | |
| 1642 | |
| 1643 A global constant address record defines an address corresponding to a global | |
| 1644 constant that can't be modified by the program. The global constant address | |
| 1645 record must be immediately followed by initializer record(s) that define how | |
| 1646 the corresponding global constant is initialized. | |
| 1647 | |
| 1648 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 const @gN, align V, <A> | |
| 1651 | |
| 1652 **Record**:: | |
| 1653 | |
| 1654 AA: <0, VV, 1> | |
| 1655 | |
| 1656 **Semantics**: | |
| 1657 | |
| 1658 A global constant address record defines a global address for a global constant. | |
| 1659 ``V`` is the :ref:`memory | |
| 1660 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for the global constant | |
| 1661 address, and is a power of 2. | |
| 1662 | |
| 1663 It is assumed that the memory, referenced by the global constant address, is | |
| 1664 only read, and can't be written to. | |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 Note that the only difference between a global variable address and a global | |
| 1667 constant address record is the third element of the record. If the value is | |
| 1668 zero, it defines a global variable address. If the value is one, it defines a | |
| 1669 global constant address. | |
| 1670 | |
| 1671 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1672 | |
| 1673 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1674 N == NumGlobalAddresses & | |
| 1675 ExpectedInitializers == 0 & | |
| 1676 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
| 1677 | |
| 1678 **Updates**:: | |
| 1679 | |
| 1680 ++NumGlobalAddresses; | |
| 1681 ExpectedInitializers = 1; | |
| 1682 TypeOf(@gN) = i32; | |
| 1683 | |
| 1684 **Examples**:: | |
| 1685 | |
| 1686 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1687 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1688 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 1> | const @g0, align 4, | |
| 1689 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1690 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g1, align 1, | |
| 1691 71:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1692 76:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1693 | |
| 1694 Zerofill Initializer | |
| 1695 -------------------- | |
| 1696 | |
| 1697 The zerofill initializer record initializes a sequence of bytes, associated with | |
| 1698 a global address, with zeros. | |
| 1699 | |
| 1700 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1701 | |
| 1702 zerofill N; <A> | |
| 1703 | |
| 1704 **Record**:: | |
| 1705 | |
| 1706 AA: <2, N> | |
| 1707 | |
| 1708 **Semantics**: | |
| 1709 | |
| 1710 A zerofill initializer record initializes a sequence of bytes, associated with a | |
| 1711 global address, with zeros. The number of bytes initialized to zero is ``N``. | |
| 1712 | |
| 1713 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1714 | |
| 1715 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1716 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
| 1717 | |
| 1718 **Updates**:: | |
| 1719 | |
| 1720 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 **Examples**:: | |
| 1723 | |
| 1724 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1725 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1726 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 1> | const @g0, align 4, | |
| 1727 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1728 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
| 1729 71:4| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
| 1730 74:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1731 | |
| 1732 Data Initializer | |
| 1733 ---------------- | |
| 1734 | |
| 1735 Data records define a sequence of bytes. These bytes define the initial value of | |
| 1736 the contents of the corresponding memory. | |
| 1737 | |
| 1738 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1739 | |
| 1740 { B1 , .... , BN } <A> | |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 **Record**:: | |
| 1743 | |
| 1744 AA: <3, B1, ..., BN> | |
| 1745 | |
| 1746 **Semantics**: | |
| 1747 | |
| 1748 A data record defines a sequence of (unsigned) bytes ``B1`` through ``BN``, that | |
| 1749 initialize ``N`` bytes of memory. | |
| 1750 | |
| 1751 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1752 | |
| 1753 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1754 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 **Updates**:: | |
| 1757 | |
| 1758 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
| 1759 | |
| 1760 **Examples**:: | |
| 1761 | |
| 1762 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
| 1763 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1764 68:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1765 70:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
| 1766 73:6| 3: <3, 1, 2, 97, 36, 44, | { 1, 2, 97, 36, 44, 88, | |
| 1767 | 88, 44, 50> | 44, 50} | |
| 1768 86:0| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g1, align 1, | |
| 1769 89:2| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
| 1770 91:6| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1771 96:4| 3: <4, 0> | reloc @f0; | |
| 1772 99:0| 3: <3, 99, 66, 22, 12> | { 99, 66, 22, 12} | |
| 1773 | | } | |
| 1774 105:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1775 | |
| 1776 Relocation Initializer | |
| 1777 ---------------------- | |
| 1778 | |
| 1779 A relocation initializer record allows one to define the initial value of a | |
| 1780 global address with the value of another global address (i.e. either | |
| 1781 :ref:`function<link_for_function_address_section>`, | |
| 1782 :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>`, or | |
| 1783 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>`). Since addresses are | |
| 1784 pointers, a relocation initializer record defines 4 bytes of memory. | |
| 1785 | |
| 1786 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1787 | |
| 1788 reloc V; <A> | |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 **Record**:: | |
| 1791 | |
| 1792 AA: <4, VV> | |
| 1793 | |
| 1794 **Semantics**: | |
| 1795 | |
| 1796 A relocation initializer record defines a 4-byte value containing the specified | |
| 1797 global address ``V``. | |
| 1798 | |
| 1799 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1802 VV == AbsoluteIndex(V) & | |
| 1803 VV >= NumFuncAddresses & | |
| 1804 VV < NumFuncAddresses + ExpectedGlobals & | |
| 1805 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
| 1806 | |
| 1807 **Updates**: | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
::
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 1808 | |
| 1809 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
| 1810 | |
| 1811 **Examples**:: | |
| 1812 | |
| 1813 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1814 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1815 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
| 1816 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
| 1817 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1818 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
| 1819 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1820 68:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1821 70:4| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g0, align 1, | |
| 1822 73:6| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
| 1823 76:2| 3: <4, 0> | reloc @f0; | |
| 1824 78:6| 3: <4, 1> | reloc @g0; | |
| 1825 81:2| 3: <4, 2> | reloc @g1; | |
| 1826 | | } | |
| 1827 83:6| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g1, align 4, | |
| 1828 87:0| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
| 1829 89:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1830 | |
| 1831 This example defines global address ``@g0`` and ``@g1``. ``@g0`` defines 12 | |
| 1832 bytes of memory, and is initialized with three addresses ``@f1``, ``@g0``, and | |
| 1833 ``@g1``. Note that all global addresses can be used in a relocation | |
| 1834 initialization record, even if it isn't defined yet. | |
| 1835 | |
| 1836 Subfield Relocation Initializer | |
| 1837 ------------------------------- | |
| 1838 | |
| 1839 A subfield relocation initializer record allows one to define the initial value | |
| 1840 of a global address with the value of another (non-function) global address | |
| 1841 (i.e. either :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` or | |
| 1842 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` address), plus a | |
| 1843 constant. Since addresses are pointers, a relocation initializer record defines | |
| 1844 4 bytes of memory. | |
| 1845 | |
| 1846 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1847 | |
| 1848 reloc V + X; <A> | |
| 1849 reloc V - X; <A> | |
| 1850 | |
| 1851 **Record**:: | |
| 1852 | |
| 1853 AA: <4, VV, XXX> | |
| 1854 | |
| 1855 **Semantics**: | |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 A subfield relocation initializer record defines a 4-byte value containing the | |
| 1858 specified global (non-function) address ``V``, modified by the unsigned offset | |
| 1859 ``X``. ``XX`` is the corresponding signed offset. In the first form, ``XX == | |
| 1860 X``. In the second form, ``XX == -X``. | |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1863 | |
| 1864 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
| 1865 VV == AbsoluteIndex(V) | |
| 1866 VV >= NumFuncAddresses | |
| 1867 VV < NumFuncAddresses + ExpectedGlobals | |
| 1868 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
| 1869 XXX == SignRotate(XX) | |
| 1870 | |
| 1871 **Updates**:: | |
| 1872 | |
| 1873 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
| 1874 | |
| 1875 **Examples**:: | |
| 1876 | |
| 1877 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1878 48:0| 3: <1, 0> | count 0; | |
| 1879 50:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1880 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1881 60:0| 3: <5, 3> | count 3; | |
| 1882 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g0, align 1, | |
| 1883 65:6| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
| 1884 68:2| 3: <4, 0, 1> | reloc @g0 + 1; | |
| 1885 71:4| 3: <4, 1, 4294967295> | reloc @g1 - 1; | |
| 1886 79:2| 3: <4, 2, 4> | reloc @g2 + 4; | |
| 1887 | | } | |
| 1888 82:4| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g1, align 4, | |
| 1889 85:6| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
| 1890 88:2| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g2, align 4, | |
| 1891 91:4| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1892 94:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1893 | |
| 1894 .. _link_for_compound_initializer: | |
| 1895 | |
| 1896 Compound Initializer | |
| 1897 -------------------- | |
| 1898 | |
| 1899 The compound initializer record must immediately follow a global | |
| 1900 :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` or | |
| 1901 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` address record. It defines how | |
| 1902 many simple initializer records are used to define the initializer. The size of | |
| 1903 the corresponding memory is the sum of the bytes needed for each of the | |
| 1904 succeeding initializers. | |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 Note that a compound initializer can't be used as a simple initializer of | |
| 1907 another compound initializer (i.e. nested compound initializers are not | |
| 1908 allowed). | |
| 1909 | |
| 1910 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 initializers N { <A> | |
| 1913 ... | |
| 1914 } | |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 **Record**:: | |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 AA: <1, N> | |
| 1919 | |
| 1920 **Semantics**: | |
| 1921 | |
| 1922 Defines that the next `N` initializers should be associated with the global | |
| 1923 address of the previous record. | |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 **Constraints**:: | |
| 1926 | |
| 1927 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 1928 ExpectedInitializers == 1 | |
| 1929 | |
| 1930 **Updates**:: | |
| 1931 | |
| 1932 ExpectedInitializers = N; | |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 **Examples**:: | |
| 1935 | |
| 1936 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 1937 48:0| 3: <1, 0> | count 0; | |
| 1938 50:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1939 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1940 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
| 1941 62:4| 3: <0, 0, 1> | const @g0, align 0, | |
| 1942 65:6| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
| 1943 68:2| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
| 1944 70:6| 3: <3, 3, 2, 1, 0> | { 3, 2, 1, 0} | |
| 1945 | | } | |
| 1946 75:4| 3: <0, 0, 0> | var @g1, align 0, | |
| 1947 78:6| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
| 1948 81:2| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
| 1949 86:0| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
| 1950 | | } | |
| 1951 88:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1952 | |
| 1953 .. _link_for_valuesymtab_block_section: | |
| 1954 | |
| 1955 Valuesymtab Block | |
| 1956 ================= | |
| 1957 | |
| 1958 The valuesymtab block does not define any values. Its only goal is to associate | |
| 1959 text names with external :ref:`function | |
| 1960 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>`. Each association is defined by a | |
| 1961 record in the valuesymtab block. Currently, only | |
| 1962 :ref:`intrinsic<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>` function addresses and | |
| 1963 the (external) start function (``_start``) can be named. All named function | |
| 1964 addresses must be external. Each record in the valuesymtab block is a *entry* | |
| 1965 record, defining a single name association. | |
| 1966 | |
| 1967 Entry Record | |
| 1968 ------------ | |
| 1969 | |
| 1970 The *entry* record defines a name for a function address. | |
| 1971 | |
| 1972 **Syntax**:: | |
| 1973 | |
| 1974 V : "NAME"; <A> | |
| 1975 | |
| 1976 **Record**:: | |
| 1977 | |
| 1978 AA: <1, B1, ... , BN> | |
| 1979 | |
| 1980 **Semantics**: | |
| 1981 | |
| 1982 The *entry* record defines a name ``NAME`` for function address ``V``. ``NAME`` is a | |
| 1983 sequence of ANSCII characters ``B1`` through ``BN``. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
ASCII
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
| 1984 | |
| 1985 **Examples**:: | |
| 1986 | |
| 1987 72:0| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
| 1988 | | void @f0(i32, i32, i32, i32, i1); | |
| 1989 76:6| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
| 1990 | | void @f1(i32, i32, i32, i32, i1); | |
| 1991 81:4| 3: <8, 5, 0, 0, 0> | define external void @f2(i32); | |
| 1992 86:2| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
| 1993 92:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
| 1994 94:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 1995 96:0| 1: <65535, 14, 2> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
| 1996 104:0| 3: <1, 1, 108, 108, 118, | @f1 : "llvm.memmove.p0i8.p0i8.i32"; | |
| 1997 | 109, 46, 109, 101, | | |
| 1998 | 109, 109, 111, 118, | | |
| 1999 | 101, 46, 112, 48, | | |
| 2000 | 105, 56, 46, 112, 48,| | |
| 2001 | 105, 56, 46, 105, 51,| | |
| 2002 | 50> | | |
| 2003 145:4| 3: <1, 2, 95, 115, 116, | @f2 : "_start"; | |
| 2004 | 97, 114, 116> | | |
| 2005 157:0| 3: <1, 0, 108, 108, 118, | @f0 : "llvm.memcpy.p0i8.p0i8.i32"; | |
| 2006 | 109, 46, 109, 101, | | |
| 2007 | 109, 99, 112, 121, | | |
| 2008 | 46, 112, 48, 105, 56,| | |
| 2009 | 46, 112, 48, 105, 56,| | |
| 2010 | 46, 105, 51, 50> | | |
| 2011 197:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 .. _link_for_module_block: | |
| 2014 | |
| 2015 Module Block | |
| 2016 ============ | |
| 2017 | |
| 2018 The module block, like all blocks, is enclosed in a pair of | |
| 2019 :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` / | |
| 2020 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` records, using block ID 8. A | |
| 2021 well-formed module block consists of the following records (in order): | |
| 2022 | |
| 2023 A version record | |
| 2024 The :ref:`version record<link_for_version_record>` communicates which version | |
| 2025 of the PNaCl bitcode reader/writer should be used. Note that this is | |
| 2026 different than the PNaCl bitcode (ABI) version. The PNaCl bitcode (ABI) | |
| 2027 version defines what is expected in records, and is defined in the header | |
| 2028 record of the bitcode file. The version record defines the version of the | |
| 2029 PNaCl bitcode reader/writer to use to convert records into bit sequences. | |
| 2030 | |
| 2031 Optional local abbreviations | |
| 2032 Defines a list of local :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` | |
| 2033 to use for records within the module block. | |
| 2034 | |
| 2035 An abbreviations block | |
| 2036 The :ref:`abbreviations block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` defines | |
| 2037 user-defined, global abbreviations that are used to convert PNaCl records to | |
| 2038 bit sequences in blocks following the abbreviations block. | |
| 2039 | |
| 2040 A types block | |
| 2041 The :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>` defines the set of all | |
| 2042 types used in the program. | |
| 2043 | |
| 2044 A non-empty sequence of function address records | |
| 2045 Each record defines a :ref:`function | |
| 2046 address<link_for_function_address_section>` used by the program. Function | |
| 2047 addresses must either be external, or defined internally by the program. If | |
| 2048 they are defined by the program, there must be a :ref:`function | |
| 2049 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` (appearing later in the module) that | |
| 2050 defines the sequence of instructions for each defined function. | |
| 2051 | |
| 2052 A globals block defining the global variables. | |
| 2053 This :ref:`block<link_for_globals_block_section>` defines the set of | |
| 2054 global :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` and | |
| 2055 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` addresses used by the | |
| 2056 program. In addition to the addresses, each global variable also defines how | |
| 2057 the corresponding global variable is initialized. | |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 An optional value symbol table block. | |
| 2060 This :ref:`block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, if defined, provides | |
| 2061 textual names for :ref:`function | |
| 2062 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>` (previously defined in the | |
| 2063 module). Note that only names for intrinsic functions and the start function | |
| 2064 are specified. | |
| 2065 | |
| 2066 A sequence of function blocks. | |
| 2067 Each :ref:`function block<link_for_Function_blocks_section>` defines the | |
| 2068 corresponding intermediate representation for each defined function. The | |
| 2069 order of function blocks is used to associate them with :ref:`function | |
| 2070 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>`. The order of the defined | |
| 2071 function blocks must follow the same order as the corresponding function | |
| 2072 addresses defined in the module block. | |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 Descriptions of the :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`, | |
| 2075 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>`, | |
| 2076 :ref:`globals<link_for_globals_block_section>`, :ref:`value symbol | |
| 2077 table<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and | |
| 2078 :ref:`function<link_for_function_blocks_section>` blocks are not provided | |
| 2079 here. See the appropriate reference for more details. The following subsections | |
| 2080 describe each of the records that can appear in a module block. | |
| 2081 | |
| 2082 .. _link_for_version_record: | |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 Version Record | |
| 2085 -------------- | |
| 2086 | |
| 2087 The version record defines the implementation of the PNaCl bitstream | |
| 2088 reader/writer to use. That is, the implementation that converts PNaCl records to | |
| 2089 bit sequences, and converts them back to PNaCl records. Note that this is | |
| 2090 different than the PNaCl version of the bitcode file (encoded in the header | |
| 2091 record of the bitcode file). The PNaCl version defines the valid forms of PNaCl | |
| 2092 records. The version record is specific to the PNaCl version, and may have | |
| 2093 different values for different PNaCl versions. | |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 Note that currently, only PNaCl bitcode version 2, and version record value 1 is | |
| 2096 defined. | |
| 2097 | |
| 2098 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2099 | |
| 2100 version N; <A> | |
| 2101 | |
| 2102 **Record**:: | |
| 2103 | |
| 2104 AA: <1, N> | |
| 2105 | |
| 2106 **Semantics**: | |
| 2107 | |
| 2108 The version record defines which PNaCl reader/writer rules should be | |
| 2109 followed. ``N`` is the version number. Currently ``N`` must be 1. Future | |
| 2110 versions of PNaCl may define additional legal values. | |
| 2111 | |
| 2112 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
| 2115 | |
| 2116 *Examples*:: | |
| 2117 | |
| 2118 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
| 2119 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
| 2120 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
| 2121 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 .. _link_for_function_address_section: | |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 Function Address | |
| 2126 ---------------- | |
| 2127 | |
| 2128 A function address record describes a function address. *Defined* function | |
| 2129 addresses define :ref:`implementations<link_for_function_blocks_section>` while | |
| 2130 *declared* function addresses do not. | |
| 2131 | |
| 2132 Since a PNaCl program is assumed to be a complete (statically linked) | |
| 2133 executable, All functions should be *defined* and *internal*. The exception to | |
| 2134 this are :ref:`intrinsic functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, which | |
| 2135 should only be *declared* and *external*, since intrinsic functions will be | |
| 2136 automatically converted to appropriate code by the :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 2137 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>`. | |
| 2138 | |
| 2139 The implementation of a *defined* function address is provided by a | |
| 2140 corresponding function block, appearing later in the module block. The | |
| 2141 association of a *defined* function address with the corresponding function | |
| 2142 block is based on position. The *Nth* defined function address record, in the | |
| 2143 module block, has its implementation in the *Nth* function block of that module | |
| 2144 block. | |
| 2145 | |
| 2146 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2147 | |
| 2148 PN LN T0 @fN ( T1 , ... , TM ); <A> | |
| 2149 | |
| 2150 **Record**:: | |
| 2151 | |
| 2152 AA: <8, T, C, P, L> | |
| 2153 | |
| 2154 **Semantics**: | |
| 2155 | |
| 2156 Describes the function address ``@fN``. ``PN`` is the name that specifies the | |
| 2157 prototype value ``P`` associated with the function. A function address is | |
| 2158 *defined* only if ``P == 0``. Otherwise, it is only *declared*. The type of the | |
| 2159 function is :ref:`function type<link_for_function_type>` ``@tT``. ``L`` is the | |
| 2160 linkage specification corresponding to name ``LN``. ``C`` is the calling | |
| 2161 convention used by the function. | |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 Note that function signature must be defined by a function type in the types | |
| 2164 block. Hence, the return value must either be a primitive type, type ``void``, | |
| 2165 or a vector type. | |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 For ordinary functions, integer parameter and types can only be ``i32`` and | |
| 2168 ``i64``. All other integer types are not allowed. For intrinsic functions, all | |
| 2169 integer types are allowed. | |
| 2170 | |
| 2171 Valid prototype names ``PN``, and corresponding ``P`` values, are: | |
| 2172 | |
| 2173 = ======= | |
| 2174 P PN | |
| 2175 = ======= | |
| 2176 1 declare | |
| 2177 0 define | |
| 2178 = ======= | |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 Valid linkage names ``LN``, and corresponding ``L`` values, are: | |
| 2181 | |
| 2182 = ======== | |
| 2183 L LN | |
| 2184 = ======== | |
| 2185 3 internal | |
| 2186 0 external | |
| 2187 = ======== | |
| 2188 | |
| 2189 Currently, only one calling convention ``C`` is supported: | |
| 2190 | |
| 2191 = ==================== | |
| 2192 C Calling Convention | |
| 2193 = ==================== | |
| 2194 0 C calling convention | |
| 2195 = ==================== | |
| 2196 | |
| 2197 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2198 | |
| 2199 AA = AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2200 T = TypeID(TypeOf(T0 ( T1 , ... , TN ))) & | |
| 2201 N = NumFuncAddresses | |
| 2202 | |
| 2203 **Updates**:: | |
| 2204 | |
| 2205 ++NumFuncAddresses; | |
| 2206 TypeOf(@fN) = TypeOf(TypeID(i32)); | |
| 2207 TypeOfFcn(@fN) = TypeOf(@tT); | |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 if PN == 0: | |
| 2210 DefiningFcnIDs += @FN; | |
| 2211 ++NumDefinedFunctionAddresses; | |
| 2212 | |
| 2213 **Examples**:: | |
| 2214 | |
| 2215 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 2216 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 2217 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 2218 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 2219 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
| 2220 57:2| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 2221 59:0| 3: <21, 0, 2, 1> | @t4 = double (float); | |
| 2222 63:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 2>| @t5 = | |
| 2223 | | i32 (i32, float, i32, double); | |
| 2224 69:2| 3: <21, 0, 3> | @t6 = void (); | |
| 2225 72:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2226 76:0| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external double @f0(float); | |
| 2227 80:6| 3: <8, 5, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
| 2228 | | i32 @f1(i32, float, i32, double); | |
| 2229 85:4| 3: <8, 6, 0, 0, 0> | define external void @f2(); | |
| 2230 | |
| 2231 .. _link_for_constants_block_section: | |
| 2232 | |
| 2233 Constants Blocks | |
| 2234 ================ | |
| 2235 | |
| 2236 Constants blocks define literal constants used within each function. Its intent | |
| 2237 it to define them once, before instructions. A constants block can only appear | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
is to define
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
| 2238 in a :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and must appear | |
| 2239 before any instructions in the function block. | |
| 2240 | |
| 2241 Currently, only integer literals, floating point literals, and undefined vector | |
| 2242 constants can be defined. | |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 To minimize type information put in a constants block, the type information is | |
| 2245 separated from the constants. This allows a sequence of constants to be given | |
| 2246 the same type. This is done by defining a :ref:`set type | |
| 2247 record<link_for_constants_set_type_record>`, followed by a sequence of literal | |
| 2248 constants. These literal constants all get converted to the type of the | |
| 2249 preceding set type record. | |
| 2250 | |
| 2251 Note that constants that are used for switch case selectors should not be added | |
| 2252 to the constants block, since the switch instruction contains the constants used | |
| 2253 for case selectors. All other constants in the function block must be put into a | |
| 2254 constants block, so that instructions can use them. | |
| 2255 | |
| 2256 To make this more concrete, consider the following example constants block:: | |
| 2257 | |
| 2258 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2259 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 2260 118:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
| 2261 121:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i32 2; | |
| 2262 123:4| 3: <1, 2> | i8: | |
| 2263 126:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c2 = i8 4; | |
| 2264 128:4| 3: <4, 6> | %c3 = i8 3; | |
| 2265 131:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
| 2266 133:4| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c4 = float 1; | |
| 2267 139:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2268 | |
| 2269 .. _link_for_constants_set_type_record: | |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 Set Type Record | |
| 2272 --------------- | |
| 2273 | |
| 2274 The *set type* record defines the type to use for the (immediately) succeeding | |
| 2275 literals. | |
| 2276 | |
| 2277 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2278 | |
| 2279 T: <A> | |
| 2280 | |
| 2281 **Record**:: | |
| 2282 | |
| 2283 AA: <1, TT> | |
| 2284 | |
| 2285 **Semantics**: | |
| 2286 | |
| 2287 The *set type* record defines type ``T`` to be used to type the (immediately) | |
| 2288 succeeding literals. ``T`` must be a non-void primitive value type or a vector | |
| 2289 type. | |
| 2290 | |
| 2291 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2292 | |
| 2293 TT == TypeID(T) | |
| 2294 | |
| 2295 **Updates**:: | |
| 2296 | |
| 2297 ConstantsSetType = T; | |
| 2298 | |
| 2299 **Examples**:: | |
| 2300 | |
| 2301 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2302 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 2303 118:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
| 2304 121:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i32 2; | |
| 2305 123:4| 3: <1, 2> | i8: | |
| 2306 126:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c2 = i8 4; | |
| 2307 128:4| 3: <4, 6> | %c3 = i8 3; | |
| 2308 131:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
| 2309 133:4| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c4 = float 1; | |
| 2310 139:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2311 | |
| 2312 .. _link_for_undefined_literal: | |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 Undefined Literal | |
| 2315 ----------------- | |
| 2316 | |
| 2317 The *undefined* literal record creates an undefined literal for the type *T* | |
| 2318 defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
| 2319 | |
| 2320 Note: See :ref:`insert element | |
| 2321 instruction<link_for_insert_element_instruction_section>` for an example of how | |
| 2322 you would use the undefined literal with vector types. | |
| 2323 | |
| 2324 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2325 | |
| 2326 %cN = T undef; <50> | |
| 2327 | |
| 2328 **Record**:: | |
| 2329 | |
| 2330 AA: <3> | |
| 2331 | |
| 2332 **Semantics**: | |
| 2333 | |
| 2334 The *undefined* literal record creates an undefined literal constant ``%cN`` for | |
| 2335 type ``T``. ``T`` must be the type defined by the preceding *set type* record, and | |
| 2336 be a primitive value type or a vector type. | |
| 2337 | |
| 2338 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2339 | |
| 2340 N == NumFcnConsts & | |
| 2341 T == ConstantsSetType & | |
| 2342 IsPrimitive(T) or IsVector(T) | |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 **Updates**:: | |
| 2345 | |
| 2346 ++NumFcnConsts; | |
| 2347 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
| 2348 | |
| 2349 **Examples**:: | |
| 2350 | |
| 2351 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 2352 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
| 2353 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 2354 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 2355 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 2356 57:2| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t3 = <4 x i32>; | |
| 2357 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t4 = void (); | |
| 2358 63:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2359 ... | |
| 2360 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2361 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 2362 118:4| 3: <3> | %c0 = i32 undef; | |
| 2363 120:2| 3: <4, 2> | %c1 = i32 1; | |
| 2364 122:6| 3: <1, 3> | <4 x i32>: | |
| 2365 125:2| 3: <3> | %c2 = <4 x i32> undef; | |
| 2366 127:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
| 2367 129:4| 3: <3> | %c3 = float undef; | |
| 2368 131:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2369 | |
| 2370 .. _link_for_integer_literal: | |
| 2371 | |
| 2372 Integer Literal | |
| 2373 --------------- | |
| 2374 | |
| 2375 The *integer literal* record creates an integer literal for the integer type *T* | |
| 2376 defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
| 2377 | |
| 2378 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2379 | |
| 2380 %cN = T V; <A> | |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 **Record**:: | |
| 2383 | |
| 2384 AA: <4, VV> | |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 **Semantics**: | |
| 2387 | |
| 2388 The *integer literal* record creates an integer literal constant ``%cN`` for | |
| 2389 type ``T``. ``T`` must be the type defined by the preceding *set type* record, | |
| 2390 and an integer type. The literal ``V`` can be signed, but must be definable by | |
| 2391 type ``T``. | |
| 2392 | |
| 2393 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2394 | |
| 2395 N == NumFcnConsts & | |
| 2396 T == ConstantsSetType & | |
| 2397 VV == SignRotate(V) & | |
| 2398 IsInteger(T) | |
| 2399 | |
| 2400 **Updates**:: | |
| 2401 | |
| 2402 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
| 2403 | |
| 2404 **Examples**:: | |
| 2405 | |
| 2406 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 2407 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 2408 50:4| 3: <7, 8> | @t0 = i8; | |
| 2409 53:0| 3: <7, 16> | @t1 = i16; | |
| 2410 55:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t2 = i32; | |
| 2411 58:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t3 = i64; | |
| 2412 62:0| 3: <7, 1> | @t4 = i1; | |
| 2413 64:4| 3: <2> | @t5 = void; | |
| 2414 66:2| 3: <21, 0, 5> | @t6 = void (); | |
| 2415 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2416 ... | |
| 2417 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2418 124:0| 3: <1, 0> | i8: | |
| 2419 126:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i8 1; | |
| 2420 129:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i8 2; | |
| 2421 131:4| 3: <1, 1> | i16: | |
| 2422 134:0| 3: <4, 6> | %c2 = i16 3; | |
| 2423 136:4| 3: <4, 8> | %c3 = i16 4; | |
| 2424 139:0| 3: <1, 2> | i32: | |
| 2425 141:4| 3: <4, 10> | %c4 = i32 5; | |
| 2426 144:0| 3: <4, 12> | %c5 = i32 6; | |
| 2427 146:4| 3: <1, 3> | i64: | |
| 2428 149:0| 3: <4, 3> | %c6 = i64 -1; | |
| 2429 151:4| 3: <4, 5> | %c7 = i64 -2; | |
| 2430 154:0| 3: <1, 4> | i1: | |
| 2431 156:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c8 = i1 1; | |
| 2432 159:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c9 = i1 0; | |
| 2433 161:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2434 | |
| 2435 Floating Point Literal | |
| 2436 ---------------------- | |
| 2437 | |
| 2438 The *floating point literal* record creates a floating point literal for the | |
| 2439 floating point type *T* defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
| 2440 | |
| 2441 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2442 | |
| 2443 %cN = T V; <A> | |
| 2444 | |
| 2445 **Record**:: | |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 AA: <6, VV> | |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 **Semantics**: | |
| 2450 | |
| 2451 The *floating point literal* record creates a floating point literal constant | |
| 2452 ``%cN`` for type ``T``. ``T`` must the type type defined by the preceding *set | |
| 2453 type* record, and be a floating point type. The literal ``V`` is the floating | |
| 2454 value to be defined. The value ``VV`` if the corresponding IEEE unsigned integer | |
| 2455 that defines value ``V``. That is, the literal ``VV`` must be a valid IEEE 754 | |
| 2456 32-bit (unsigned integer) value if ``T`` is ``float``, and a valid IEEE 754 | |
| 2457 64-bit (unsigned integer) value if ``T`` is ``double``. | |
| 2458 | |
| 2459 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2460 | |
| 2461 N == NumFcnConsts | |
| 2462 T == ConstantsSetType | |
| 2463 IsFloat(T) | |
| 2464 | |
| 2465 **Updates**:: | |
| 2466 | |
| 2467 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
| 2468 | |
| 2469 **Examples**:: | |
| 2470 | |
| 2471 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 2472 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 2473 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 2474 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
| 2475 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 2476 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
| 2477 59:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2478 ... | |
| 2479 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2480 112:0| 3: <1, 0> | float: | |
| 2481 114:4| 3: <6, 0> | %c0 = float 0; | |
| 2482 117:0| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c1 = float 1; | |
| 2483 123:2| 3: <6, 1088421888> | %c2 = float 7; | |
| 2484 130:2| 3: <6, 1090519040> | %c3 = float 8; | |
| 2485 137:2| 3: <3> | %c4 = float undef; | |
| 2486 139:0| 3: <6, 2143289344> | %c5 = float nan; | |
| 2487 146:0| 3: <6, 2139095040> | %c6 = float inf; | |
| 2488 153:0| 3: <6, 4286578688> | %c7 = float -inf; | |
| 2489 160:0| 3: <1, 1> | double: | |
| 2490 162:4| 3: <6, | %c8 = double 1; | |
| 2491 | 4607182418800017408> | | |
| 2492 174:0| 3: <6, 0> | %c9 = double 0; | |
| 2493 176:4| 3: <6, | %c10 = double 5; | |
| 2494 | 4617315517961601024> | | |
| 2495 188:0| 3: <6, | %c11 = double 6; | |
| 2496 | 4618441417868443648> | | |
| 2497 199:4| 3: <6, | %c12 = double nan; | |
| 2498 | 9221120237041090560> | | |
| 2499 211:0| 3: <6, | %c13 = double inf; | |
| 2500 | 9218868437227405312> | | |
| 2501 222:4| 3: <6, | %c14 = double -inf; | |
| 2502 | 18442240474082181120>| | |
| 2503 234:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2504 | |
| 2505 .. _link_for_function_blocks_section: | |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 Function Blocks | |
| 2508 =============== | |
| 2509 | |
| 2510 A function block defines the implementation of a defined :ref:`function | |
| 2511 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. The function address it defines is | |
| 2512 based on the position of the corresponding defined function address. The Nth | |
| 2513 defined function address always corresponds to the Nth function block in the | |
| 2514 module block. | |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 A function implementation contains a list of basic blocks, forming the control | |
| 2517 flow graph. Each *basic block* contains a list of instructions, and ends with a | |
| 2518 :ref:`terminator instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` | |
| 2519 (e.g. branch). | |
| 2520 | |
| 2521 Basic blocks are not represented by records. Rather, context is implicit. The | |
| 2522 first basic block begins with the first instruction record in the function | |
| 2523 block. Block boundaries are determined by terminator instructions. The | |
| 2524 instruction that follows a terminator instruction begins a new basic block. | |
| 2525 | |
| 2526 The first basic block in a function is special in two ways: it is immediately | |
| 2527 executed on entrance to the function, and it is not allowed to have predecessor | |
| 2528 basic blocks (i.e. there can't be any branches to the entry block of a | |
| 2529 function). Because the entry block has no predecessors, it also can't have any | |
| 2530 :ref:`phi<link_for_phi_instruction_section>` instructions. | |
| 2531 | |
| 2532 The parameters are implied by the type of the corresponding function | |
| 2533 address. One parameter is defined for each argument of the function :ref:`type | |
| 2534 signature<link_for_function_type>` of the corresponding :ref:`function | |
| 2535 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. | |
| 2536 | |
| 2537 The number of basic blocks is defined by the :ref:`count | |
| 2538 record<link_for_basic_blocks_count>`. Each ::ref::`terminator | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
::ref:: ==> :ref: (I think)
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 2539 instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` ends the current basic | |
| 2540 block, and the next instruction begins a new basic block. Basic blocks are | |
| 2541 numbered by the order they appear (starting with index 0). Basic block IDs have | |
| 2542 the form ``%bN``, where ``N`` corresponds to the position of the basic block | |
| 2543 within the function block. | |
| 2544 | |
| 2545 Each instruction, within a function block, corresponds to a corresponding PNaCl | |
| 2546 record. The layout of a function block is the (basic block) count record, | |
| 2547 followed by a sequence of instruction records. | |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 For readability, PNaClAsm introduces basic block IDs. These basic block IDs do | |
| 2550 not correspond to PNaCl records, since basic block boundaries are defined | |
| 2551 implicitly, after terminator instructions. They appear only for readability. | |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 Operands of instructions are defined using an :ref:`absolute | |
| 2554 index<link_for_absolute_index_section>`. This absolute index implicitly encodes | |
| 2555 function addresses, global addresses, parameters, constants, and instructions | |
| 2556 that generate values. The encoding takes advantage of the implied ordering of | |
| 2557 these values in the bitcode file, defining a contiguous sequence of indices for | |
| 2558 each kind of identifier. That is, indices are ordered by putting function | |
| 2559 address identifiers first, followed by global address identifiers, followed by | |
| 2560 parameter identifiers, followed by constant identifiers, and lastly instruction | |
| 2561 value identifiers. | |
| 2562 | |
| 2563 To save space in the encoded bitcode file, most operands are encoded using a | |
| 2564 :ref:`relative index<link_for_relative_index>` value, rather than | |
| 2565 :ref:`absolute<link_for_absolute_index_section>`. This | |
| 2566 is done because most instruction operands refer to values defined earlier in the | |
| 2567 (same) basic block. As a result, the relative distance (back) from the next | |
| 2568 value defining instruction is frequently a small number. Small numbers tend to | |
| 2569 require fewer bits when they are converted to bit sequences. | |
| 2570 | |
| 2571 Note that instructions that can appear in a function block are defined in sectio ns | |
| 2572 :ref:`link_for_terminator_instruction_section`, | |
| 2573 :ref:`link_for_integer_binary_instructions`, | |
| 2574 :ref:`link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions`, | |
| 2575 :ref:`link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions`, | |
| 2576 :ref:`link_for_conversion_instructions`, | |
| 2577 :ref:`link_for_compare_instructions`, | |
| 2578 :ref:`link_for_vector_instructions`, and | |
| 2579 :ref:`link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions`. | |
| 2580 | |
| 2581 The following subsections define the remaining records that can appear in a | |
| 2582 function block. | |
| 2583 | |
| 2584 Function Enter | |
| 2585 -------------- | |
| 2586 | |
| 2587 PNaClAsm defines a function enter block construct. The corresponding record is | |
| 2588 simply an :ref:`enter block<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` record, with | |
| 2589 BlockID value ``12``. All context about the defining address is implicit by the | |
| 2590 position of the function block, and the corresponding defining :ref:`function | |
| 2591 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. To improve readability, PNaClAsm | |
| 2592 includes the function signature into the syntax rule. | |
| 2593 | |
| 2594 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2595 | |
| 2596 function TR @fN ( T0 %p0, ... , TM %pM ) { <B> | |
| 2597 | |
| 2598 **Record**:: | |
| 2599 | |
| 2600 1: <65535, 12, B> | |
| 2601 | |
| 2602 **Semantics**: | |
| 2603 | |
| 2604 ``B`` is the number of bits reserved for abbreviations in the block. If it is | |
| 2605 omitted, 2 is assumed. See :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` | |
| 2606 block records for more details. | |
| 2607 | |
| 2608 The value of ``N`` corresponds to the positional index of the corresponding | |
| 2609 defining function address this block is associated with. ``M`` is the number of | |
| 2610 defined parameters (minus one) in the function heading. | |
| 2611 | |
| 2612 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2613 | |
| 2614 N == NumFcnImpls & | |
| 2615 @fN in DefiningFcnIDs & | |
| 2616 TypeOfFcn(@fN) == TypeOf(TypeID(TR (T0, ... , TM))) | |
| 2617 | |
| 2618 **Updates**:: | |
| 2619 | |
| 2620 ++NumFcnImpls; | |
| 2621 EnclosingFcnID = @fN; | |
| 2622 NumBasicBlocks = 0; | |
| 2623 ExpectedBlocks = 0; | |
| 2624 NumParams = M; | |
| 2625 for I in [0..M]: | |
| 2626 TypeOf(%pI) = TypeOf(TypeID(TI)); | |
| 2627 | |
| 2628 **Examples**:: | |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 2631 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 2632 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 2633 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 2634 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (); | |
| 2635 58:6| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0> | @t3 = i32 (i32); | |
| 2636 62:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2637 ... | |
| 2638 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 2639 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2640 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2641 | | %b0: | |
| 2642 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2643 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2644 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
| 2645 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2646 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2647 | | %b0: | |
| 2648 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
| 2649 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2650 | |
| 2651 .. _link_for_basic_blocks_count: | |
| 2652 | |
| 2653 Count Record | |
| 2654 ------------ | |
| 2655 | |
| 2656 The count record, within a function block, defines the number of basic blocks | |
| 2657 used to define the function implementation. It must be the first record in the | |
| 2658 function block. | |
| 2659 | |
| 2660 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2661 | |
| 2662 blocks: N; <A> | |
| 2663 %b0: | |
| 2664 | |
| 2665 **Record**:: | |
| 2666 | |
| 2667 AA: <1, N> | |
| 2668 | |
| 2669 **Semantics**: | |
| 2670 | |
| 2671 The count record defines the number ``N`` of basic blocks in the implemented | |
| 2672 function. | |
| 2673 | |
| 2674 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2675 | |
| 2676 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2677 ExpectedBasicBlocks == N & | |
| 2678 NumBasicBlocks == 0 | |
| 2679 | |
| 2680 **Updates**:: | |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 2683 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2684 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2685 | | %b0: | |
| 2686 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2687 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2688 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
| 2689 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2690 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2691 | | %b0: | |
| 2692 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
| 2693 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2694 | |
| 2695 .. _link_for_terminator_instruction_section: | |
| 2696 | |
| 2697 Terminator Instructions | |
| 2698 ======================= | |
| 2699 | |
| 2700 Terminator instructions are instructions that appear in a :ref:`function | |
| 2701 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and define the end of the current | |
| 2702 basic block. A terminator instruction indicates which block should be executed | |
| 2703 after the current block is finished. The function block is well formed only if | |
| 2704 the number of terminator instructions, in the function block, corresponds to the | |
| 2705 value defined by the corresponding function basic block :ref:`count | |
| 2706 record<link_for_basic_blocks_count>`. | |
| 2707 | |
| 2708 Note that any branch instruction to label ``%bN``, where ``N >= | |
| 2709 ExpectedBasicBlocks``, is illegal. For ease of readability, this constraint | |
| 2710 hasn't been put on branch instructions. Rather it is only implied. | |
| 2711 | |
| 2712 In addition, it must be the case that ``NumBasicBlocks < ExpectedBasicBlocks``, | |
| 2713 and will not be listed as a constraint. Further, if ``B = NumBasicBlocks + 1`` | |
| 2714 is the number associated with the next basic block. Label `%bB:` only appears | |
| 2715 if:: | |
| 2716 | |
| 2717 B < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
| 2718 | |
| 2719 That is, the label is omitted only if this terminator instruction is the last | |
| 2720 instruction in the function block. | |
| 2721 | |
| 2722 Return Void Instruction | |
| 2723 ----------------------- | |
| 2724 | |
| 2725 The return void instruction is used to return control from a function back to | |
| 2726 the caller, without returning any value. | |
| 2727 | |
| 2728 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2729 | |
| 2730 ret void; <A> | |
| 2731 %bB: | |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 **Record**:: | |
| 2734 | |
| 2735 AA: <10> | |
| 2736 | |
| 2737 **Semantics**: | |
| 2738 | |
| 2739 The return void instruction returns control to the calling function. | |
| 2740 | |
| 2741 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2742 | |
| 2743 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2744 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 2745 ReturnType(TypeOf(EnclosingFcnID)) == void | |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 **Updates**:: | |
| 2748 | |
| 2749 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 2750 | |
| 2751 **Examples**:: | |
| 2752 | |
| 2753 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 2754 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2755 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2756 | | %b0: | |
| 2757 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2758 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2759 | |
| 2760 Return Value Instruction | |
| 2761 ------------------------ | |
| 2762 | |
| 2763 The return value instruction is used to return control from a function back to | |
| 2764 the caller, including a value. The value must correspond to the return type of | |
| 2765 the enclosing function. | |
| 2766 | |
| 2767 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 ret T V; <A> | |
| 2770 %bB: | |
| 2771 | |
| 2772 **Record**:: | |
| 2773 | |
| 2774 AA: <10, VV> | |
| 2775 | |
| 2776 **Semantics**: | |
| 2777 | |
| 2778 The return value instruction returns control to the calling function, returning | |
| 2779 the provided value. | |
| 2780 | |
| 2781 ``V`` is the value to return. Type ``T`` must be of the type returned by the | |
| 2782 function. It must also be the type associated with value ``V``. | |
| 2783 | |
| 2784 The return type ``T`` must either be a (non-void) primitive type, or a vector | |
| 2785 type. If the function block is implementing an ordinary function, and the return | |
| 2786 type is an integer type, it must be either ``i32`` or ``i64``. | |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2789 | |
| 2790 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2791 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 2792 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 2793 T == TypeOf(V) == ReturnType(TypeOf(EnclosingFcnID)) | |
| 2794 | |
| 2795 **Updates**:: | |
| 2796 | |
| 2797 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 2798 | |
| 2799 **Examples**:: | |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
| 2802 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2803 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 2804 | | %b0: | |
| 2805 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
| 2806 | |
| 2807 Unconditional Branch Instruction | |
| 2808 -------------------------------- | |
| 2809 | |
| 2810 The unconditional branch instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer | |
| 2811 to a different basic block of the function. | |
| 2812 | |
| 2813 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2814 | |
| 2815 br %bN; <A> | |
| 2816 %bB: | |
| 2817 | |
| 2818 **Record**:: | |
| 2819 | |
| 2820 AA: <11, N> | |
| 2821 | |
| 2822 **Semantics**: | |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 The unconditional branch instruction causes control flow to transfer to basic | |
| 2825 block ``N``. | |
| 2826 | |
| 2827 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2828 | |
| 2829 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2830 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 2831 0 < N & | |
| 2832 N < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 **Updates**:: | |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 2837 | |
| 2838 **Examples**:: | |
| 2839 | |
| 2840 88:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 2841 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2842 96:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
| 2843 | | %b0: | |
| 2844 98:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
| 2845 | | %b1: | |
| 2846 101:0| 3: <11, 4> | br label %b4; | |
| 2847 | | %b2: | |
| 2848 103:4| 3: <11, 1> | br label %b1; | |
| 2849 | | %b3: | |
| 2850 106:0| 3: <11, 2> | br label %b2; | |
| 2851 | | %b4: | |
| 2852 108:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2853 110:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2854 | |
| 2855 Conditional Branch Instruction | |
| 2856 ------------------------------ | |
| 2857 | |
| 2858 The conditional branch instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer to | |
| 2859 a different basic block of the function, based on a boolean test condition. | |
| 2860 | |
| 2861 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2862 | |
| 2863 br i1 C, %bT, %bBF; <A> | |
| 2864 %bB: | |
| 2865 | |
| 2866 **Record**:: | |
| 2867 | |
| 2868 AA: <11, T, F, CC> | |
| 2869 | |
| 2870 **Semantics**: | |
| 2871 | |
| 2872 Upon execution of a conditional branch instruction, the *i1* (boolean) argument | |
| 2873 ``C`` is evaluated. If the value is ``true``, control flows to basic block | |
| 2874 ``%bT``. Otherwise control flows to basic block ``%bF``. | |
| 2875 | |
| 2876 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2877 | |
| 2878 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2879 CC == RelativeIndex(C) & | |
| 2880 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 2881 0 < T & | |
| 2882 B1 < ExpectedBasicBlocks & | |
| 2883 0 < F & | |
| 2884 B2 < ExpectedBasicBlocks & | |
| 2885 TypeOf(C) == i1 | |
| 2886 | |
| 2887 **Updates**:: | |
| 2888 | |
| 2889 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 2890 | |
| 2891 **Examples**:: | |
| 2892 | |
| 2893 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 2894 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2895 100:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
| 2896 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2897 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | i1: | |
| 2898 114:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
| 2899 117:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
| 2900 119:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2901 | | %b0: | |
| 2902 120:0| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
| 2903 | | %b1: | |
| 2904 122:4| 3: <11, 2, 4, 2> | br i1 %c0, label %b2, label %b4; | |
| 2905 | | %b2: | |
| 2906 126:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
| 2907 | | %b3: | |
| 2908 129:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2909 | | %b4: | |
| 2910 130:6| 3: <11, 2, 3, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b2, label %b3; | |
| 2911 134:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2912 | |
| 2913 Unreachable | |
| 2914 ----------- | |
| 2915 | |
| 2916 The unreachable instruction has no defined semantics. The instruction is used to | |
| 2917 inform the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` that control | |
| 2918 can't reach this instruction. | |
| 2919 | |
| 2920 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2921 | |
| 2922 unreachable; <A> | |
| 2923 %bB: | |
| 2924 | |
| 2925 **Record**:: | |
| 2926 | |
| 2927 AA: <15> | |
| 2928 | |
| 2929 **Semantics**: | |
| 2930 | |
| 2931 Directive to the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` that | |
| 2932 this instruction is unreachable. | |
| 2933 | |
| 2934 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2935 | |
| 2936 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
| 2937 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 **Updates**:: | |
| 2940 | |
| 2941 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 2942 | |
| 2943 **Examples**:: | |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 2946 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 2947 116:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
| 2948 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 2949 128:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
| 2950 130:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
| 2951 133:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
| 2952 135:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2953 | | %b0: | |
| 2954 136:0| 3: <11, 1, 2, 2> | br i1 %c0, label %b1, label %b2; | |
| 2955 | | %b1: | |
| 2956 140:0| 3: <11, 3, 4, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b3, label %b4; | |
| 2957 | | %b2: | |
| 2958 144:0| 3: <15> | unreachable; | |
| 2959 | | %b3: | |
| 2960 145:6| 3: <15> | unreachable; | |
| 2961 | | %b4: | |
| 2962 147:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 2963 149:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 2964 | |
| 2965 Switch Instruction | |
| 2966 ------------------ | |
| 2967 | |
| 2968 The *switch* instruction transfers control flow to one of several different | |
| 2969 places, based on a selector value. It is a generalization of the conditional | |
| 2970 branch instruction. | |
| 2971 | |
| 2972 **Syntax**:: | |
| 2973 | |
| 2974 switch T V0 { | |
| 2975 default: br label %bB0; | |
| 2976 T V1: br label %bB1; | |
| 2977 ... | |
| 2978 T VN: br label %bBN; | |
| 2979 } <A> | |
| 2980 %bB: | |
| 2981 | |
| 2982 **Record**:: | |
| 2983 | |
| 2984 AA: <12, TT, B0, N, (1, 1, VVI, BI | 1 <= i <= N)> | |
| 2985 | |
| 2986 **Semantics**: | |
| 2987 | |
| 2988 The switch instruction transfers control to a basic block in ``B0`` through | |
| 2989 ``BN``. Value ``V`` is used to conditionally select which block to branch | |
| 2990 to. ``T`` is the type of ``V`` and ``V1`` through ``VN``, and must be an integer | |
| 2991 type. Value ``V1`` through ``VN`` are integers to compare against ``V``. If sele ctor | |
| 2992 ``V`` matches ``VI`` (for some ``I``, ``1 <= I <= N``), then the instruction bra nches to | |
| 2993 block ``BI``. If ``V`` is not in ``V1`` through ``VN``, the instruction branches to | |
| 2994 block ``B0``. | |
| 2995 | |
| 2996 **Constraints**:: | |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 2999 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
| 3000 TT == TypeID(T) & | |
| 3001 VI == SignRotate(VI) for all I, 1 <= I <= N & | |
| 3002 | |
| 3003 **Updates**:: | |
| 3004 | |
| 3005 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 **Examples**:: | |
| 3008 | |
| 3009 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 3010 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3011 124:0| 3: <1, 6> | blocks 6; | |
| 3012 | | %b0: | |
| 3013 126:4| 3: <12, 1, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1,| switch i32 %p0 { | |
| 3014 | 2, 3, 1, 1, 4, 3, 1, | default: br label %b2; | |
| 3015 | 1, 8, 4, 1, 1, 10, 4>| i32 1: br label %b3; | |
| 3016 | | i32 2: br label %b3; | |
| 3017 | | i32 4: br label %b4; | |
| 3018 | | i32 5: br label %b4; | |
| 3019 | | } | |
| 3020 | | %b1: | |
| 3021 143:2| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3022 | | %b2: | |
| 3023 145:6| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3024 | | %b3: | |
| 3025 148:2| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3026 | | %b4: | |
| 3027 150:6| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3028 | | %b5: | |
| 3029 153:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 3030 155:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3031 156:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1(i64 %p0) { | |
| 3032 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3033 164:0| 3: <1, 6> | blocks 6; | |
| 3034 | | %b0: | |
| 3035 166:4| 3: <12, 2, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1,| switch i64 %p0 { | |
| 3036 | 2, 3, 1, 1, 4, 3, 1, | default: br label %b2; | |
| 3037 | 1, 8, 4, 1, 1, | i64 1: br label %b3; | |
| 3038 | 39777555332, 4> | i64 2: br label %b3; | |
| 3039 | | i64 4: br label %b4; | |
| 3040 | | i64 19888777666: br label %b4; | |
| 3041 | | } | |
| 3042 | | %b1: | |
| 3043 188:4| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3044 | | %b2: | |
| 3045 191:0| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3046 | | %b3: | |
| 3047 193:4| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3048 | | %b4: | |
| 3049 196:0| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
| 3050 | | %b5: | |
| 3051 198:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 3052 200:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3053 | |
| 3054 .. _link_for_integer_binary_instructions: | |
| 3055 | |
| 3056 Integer Binary Instructions | |
| 3057 =========================== | |
| 3058 | |
| 3059 Binary instructions are used to do most of the computation in a program. This | |
| 3060 section focuses on binary instructions that operator on integer values, or | |
| 3061 vectors of integer values. | |
| 3062 | |
| 3063 All binary operations require two operands of the same type, execute an | |
| 3064 operation on them, and produce a value. The value may represent multiple values | |
| 3065 if the type is a vector type. The result value always has the same type as its | |
| 3066 operands. | |
| 3067 | |
| 3068 Some integer binary operations can be applied to both signed and unsigned | |
| 3069 integers. Others, the sign is significant. In general, if the sign plays a role | |
| 3070 in the instruction, the sign information is encoded into the name of the | |
| 3071 instruction. | |
| 3072 | |
| 3073 For most binary operations (except some of the logical operations), integer | |
| 3074 type i1 is disallowed. | |
| 3075 | |
| 3076 Integer Add | |
| 3077 ----------- | |
| 3078 | |
| 3079 The integer add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Both arguments | |
| 3080 and the result must be of the same type. That type must be integer, or an | |
| 3081 integer vector type. | |
| 3082 | |
| 3083 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3084 | |
| 3085 %vN = add T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3086 | |
| 3087 **Record**:: | |
| 3088 | |
| 3089 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 0> | |
| 3090 | |
| 3091 **Semantics**: | |
| 3092 | |
| 3093 The integer add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Arguments | |
| 3094 ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be | |
| 3095 an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
| 3096 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3097 | |
| 3098 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
| 3099 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:55
Could you make this "bit width" or "bit-width", he
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
| 3100 | |
| 3101 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
| 3102 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
| 3103 | |
| 3104 In the add instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
| 3105 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
| 3106 | |
| 3107 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3108 | |
| 3109 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3110 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3111 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3112 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3113 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3114 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3115 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3116 | |
| 3117 **Updates**:: | |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3120 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 **Examples**:: | |
| 3123 | |
| 3124 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3125 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3126 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3127 | | %b0: | |
| 3128 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3129 110:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v0; | |
| 3130 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3131 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3132 | |
| 3133 Integer Subtract | |
| 3134 ---------------- | |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 The integer subtract instruction returns the difference of its two arguments. | |
| 3137 Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be | |
| 3138 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3139 | |
| 3140 Note: Since there isn't a negate instruction, subtraction from constant zero | |
| 3141 should be used to negate values. | |
| 3142 | |
| 3143 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3144 | |
| 3145 %vN = sub T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3146 | |
| 3147 **Record**:: | |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 1> | |
| 3150 | |
| 3151 **Semantics**: | |
| 3152 | |
| 3153 The integer subtract returns the difference of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1 `` | |
| 3154 and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integ er | |
| 3155 type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
| 3156 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
| 3159 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
| 3160 | |
| 3161 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
| 3162 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 In the subtract instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
| 3165 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
| 3166 | |
| 3167 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3168 | |
| 3169 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3170 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3171 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3172 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3173 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3174 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3175 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3176 | |
| 3177 **Updates**:: | |
| 3178 | |
| 3179 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3180 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 **Examples**:: | |
| 3183 | |
| 3184 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3185 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3186 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3187 | | %b0: | |
| 3188 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 1> | %v0 = sub i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3189 110:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %p0, %v0; | |
| 3190 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3191 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3192 | |
| 3193 Integer Multiply | |
| 3194 ---------------- | |
| 3195 | |
| 3196 The integer multiply instruction returns the product of its two arguments. Both | |
| 3197 arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be integer, | |
| 3198 or an integer based vector type. | |
| 3199 | |
| 3200 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3201 | |
| 3202 &vN = mul T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3203 | |
| 3204 **Record**:: | |
| 3205 | |
| 3206 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 2> | |
| 3207 | |
| 3208 **Semantics**: | |
| 3209 | |
| 3210 The integer multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
| 3211 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
| 3212 ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is | |
| 3213 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
| 3214 the instruction. | |
| 3215 | |
| 3216 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
| 3217 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
| 3218 | |
| 3219 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
| 3220 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
| 3221 | |
| 3222 In the subtract instruction, integer type ``i1`` (or a vector on integer type | |
| 3223 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
| 3224 | |
| 3225 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3226 | |
| 3227 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3228 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3229 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3230 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3231 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3232 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3233 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3234 | |
| 3235 **Updates**:: | |
| 3236 | |
| 3237 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3238 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3239 | |
| 3240 **Examples**:: | |
| 3241 | |
| 3242 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3243 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3244 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3245 | | %b0: | |
| 3246 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = mul i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3247 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 3, 2> | %v1 = mul i32 %v0, %p0; | |
| 3248 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3249 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 Signed Integer Divide | |
| 3252 --------------------- | |
| 3253 | |
| 3254 The signed integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two arguments. | |
| 3255 Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be | |
| 3256 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3259 | |
| 3260 %vN = sdiv T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 **Record**:: | |
| 3263 | |
| 3264 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 4> | |
| 3265 | |
| 3266 **Semantics**: | |
| 3267 | |
| 3268 The signed integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
| 3269 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
| 3270 ``T``. ``T`` must be a integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined | |
| 3271 by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by the | |
| 3272 instruction. | |
| 3273 | |
| 3274 Signed values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
| 3275 distinct operations. For unsigned integer division use the unsigned integer | |
| 3276 divide instruction (udiv). | |
| 3277 | |
| 3278 In the signed integer divide instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
| 3279 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Integer division by zero is guaranteed to | |
| 3280 trap. | |
| 3281 | |
| 3282 Note that overflow can happen with this instruction when dividing the maximum | |
| 3283 negative integer by ``-1``. The behavior for this case is currently undefined. | |
| 3284 | |
| 3285 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3286 | |
| 3287 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3288 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3289 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3290 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3291 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3292 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3293 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3294 | |
| 3295 **Updates**:: | |
| 3296 | |
| 3297 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3298 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 **Examples**:: | |
| 3301 | |
| 3302 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3303 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3304 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3305 | | %b0: | |
| 3306 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 4> | %v0 = sdiv i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3307 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 4> | %v1 = sdiv i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3308 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3309 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3310 | |
| 3311 Unsigned Integer Divide | |
| 3312 ----------------------- | |
| 3313 | |
| 3314 The unsigned integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
| 3315 arguments. Both the arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
| 3316 must be integer, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3317 | |
| 3318 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3319 | |
| 3320 %vN = udiv T V1, V2; <a> | |
| 3321 | |
| 3322 **Record**:: | |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 AA: <2, A1, A2, 3> | |
| 3325 | |
| 3326 **Semantics**: | |
| 3327 | |
| 3328 The unsigned integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
| 3329 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
| 3330 ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is | |
| 3331 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
| 3332 the instruction. | |
| 3333 | |
| 3334 Unsigned integer values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer | |
| 3335 division are distinct operations. For signed integer division use the signed | |
| 3336 integer divide instruction (sdiv). | |
| 3337 | |
| 3338 In the unsigned integer divide instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
| 3339 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
| 3340 | |
| 3341 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3342 | |
| 3343 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3344 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3345 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3346 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3347 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3348 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3349 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3350 | |
| 3351 **Updates**:: | |
| 3352 | |
| 3353 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3354 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3355 | |
| 3356 **Examples**:: | |
| 3357 | |
| 3358 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3359 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3360 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3361 | | %b0: | |
| 3362 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 3> | %v0 = udiv i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3363 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 3> | %v1 = udiv i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3364 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3365 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3366 | |
| 3367 Signed Integer Remainder | |
| 3368 ------------------------ | |
| 3369 | |
| 3370 The signed integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 3371 of its two arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same | |
| 3372 type. That type must be integer, or an integer based vector type. | |
| 3373 | |
| 3374 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3375 | |
| 3376 %vN = srem T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3377 | |
| 3378 **Record**:: | |
| 3379 | |
| 3380 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 6> | |
| 3381 | |
| 3382 **Semantics**: | |
| 3383 | |
| 3384 The signed integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 3385 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must | |
| 3386 be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` | |
| 3387 is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
| 3388 the instruction. | |
| 3389 | |
| 3390 Signed values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
| 3391 distinct operations. For unsigned integer division use the unsigned integer | |
| 3392 remainder instruction (urem). | |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 In the signed integer remainder instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector o f | |
| 3395 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
| 3396 | |
| 3397 Note that overflow can happen with this instruction when dividing the maximum | |
| 3398 negative integer by ``-1``. The behavior for this case is currently undefined. | |
| 3399 | |
| 3400 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3401 | |
| 3402 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3403 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3404 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3405 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3406 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3407 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3408 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3409 | |
| 3410 **Updates**:: | |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3413 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3414 | |
| 3415 **Examples**:: | |
| 3416 | |
| 3417 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3418 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3419 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3420 | | %b0: | |
| 3421 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 6> | %v0 = srem i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3422 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 6> | %v1 = srem i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3423 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3424 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3425 | |
| 3426 Unsigned Integer Remainder Instruction | |
| 3427 -------------------------------------- | |
| 3428 | |
| 3429 The unsigned integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 3430 of its two arguments. Both the arguments and the result must be of the same | |
| 3431 type. The type must be integer, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3432 | |
| 3433 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3434 | |
| 3435 %vN = urem T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3436 | |
| 3437 **Record**:: | |
| 3438 | |
| 3439 AA: <2, A1, A2, 5> | |
| 3440 | |
| 3441 **Semantics**: | |
| 3442 | |
| 3443 The unsigned integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 3444 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must | |
| 3445 be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3446 ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
| 3447 generated by the instruction. | |
| 3448 | |
| 3449 Unsigned values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
| 3450 distinct operations. For signed integer division use the remainder instruction | |
| 3451 (srem). | |
| 3452 | |
| 3453 In the unsigned integer remainder instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
| 3454 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
| 3455 | |
| 3456 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3457 | |
| 3458 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3459 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3460 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3461 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3462 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3463 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3464 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3465 | |
| 3466 **Updates**:: | |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3469 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 **Examples**:: | |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3474 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3475 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3476 | | %b0: | |
| 3477 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 5> | %v0 = urem i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3478 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 5> | %v1 = urem i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3479 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3480 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3481 | |
| 3482 Shift Left | |
| 3483 ---------- | |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 The (integer) shift left instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
| 3486 left a specified number of bits with zero fill. The shifted value must be | |
| 3487 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
| 3488 | |
| 3489 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3490 | |
| 3491 %vN = shl T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3492 | |
| 3493 **Record**:: | |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 7> | |
| 3496 | |
| 3497 **Semantics**: | |
| 3498 | |
| 3499 This instruction performs a shift left operation. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2`` | |
| 3500 and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer, or a | |
| 3501 vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the | |
| 3502 corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3503 | |
| 3504 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The least significant bits of the result will | |
| 3505 be filled with zero bits after the shift. If ``V2`` is (statically or | |
| 3506 dynamically) negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in | |
| 3507 ``V1``, the result is undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector | |
| 3508 element of ``V1`` is shifted by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
| 3509 | |
| 3510 In the shift left instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
| 3511 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
| 3512 | |
| 3513 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3514 | |
| 3515 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3516 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3517 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3518 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3519 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3520 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3521 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3522 | |
| 3523 **Updates**:: | |
| 3524 | |
| 3525 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3526 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3527 | |
| 3528 **Examples**:: | |
| 3529 | |
| 3530 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3531 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3532 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3533 | | %b0: | |
| 3534 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 7> | %v0 = shl i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3535 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 7> | %v1 = shl i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3536 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3537 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3538 | |
| 3539 Logical Shift Right | |
| 3540 ------------------- | |
| 3541 | |
| 3542 The logical shift right instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
| 3543 right a specified number of bits with zero fill. | |
| 3544 | |
| 3545 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3546 | |
| 3547 %vN = lshr T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3548 | |
| 3549 **Record**:: | |
| 3550 | |
| 3551 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 8> | |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 **Semantics**: | |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 This instruction performs a logical shift right operation. Arguments ``V1`` and | |
| 3556 ``V2`` and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer, | |
| 3557 or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the | |
| 3558 corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3559 | |
| 3560 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The most significant bits of the result will b e | |
| 3561 filled with zero bits after the shift. If ``V2`` is (statically or dynamically) | |
| 3562 negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in ``V1``, the result is | |
| 3563 undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector element of ``V1`` is shifte d | |
| 3564 by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
| 3565 | |
| 3566 In the logical shift right instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
| 3567 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
| 3568 | |
| 3569 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3570 | |
| 3571 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3572 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3573 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3574 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3575 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3576 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3577 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3578 | |
| 3579 **Updates**:: | |
| 3580 | |
| 3581 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3582 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3583 | |
| 3584 **Examples**:: | |
| 3585 | |
| 3586 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3587 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3588 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3589 | | %b0: | |
| 3590 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 8> | %v0 = lshr i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3591 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 8> | %v1 = lshr i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3592 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3593 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3594 | |
| 3595 Arithmetic Shift Right | |
| 3596 ---------------------- | |
| 3597 | |
| 3598 The arithmetic shift right instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
| 3599 right a specified number of bits with sign extension. | |
| 3600 | |
| 3601 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3602 | |
| 3603 %vN = ashr T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3604 | |
| 3605 **Record**:: | |
| 3606 | |
| 3607 AA: <2, VV1, VVA2, 9> | |
| 3608 | |
| 3609 **Semantics**: | |
| 3610 | |
| 3611 This instruction performs an arithmetic shift right operation. Arguments ``V1`` | |
| 3612 and ``V2`` and and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an | |
| 3613 integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
| 3614 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The most significant bits of the result will b e | |
| 3617 filled with the sign bit of ``V1``. If ``V2`` is (statically or dynamically) | |
| 3618 negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in ``V1``, the result is | |
| 3619 undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector element of ``V1`` is shifte d | |
| 3620 by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 In the arithmetic shift right instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
| 3623 integral type ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Hmm, the html version says "integrl" here, so I gu
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Will regenerate to verify.
| |
| 3624 | |
| 3625 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3626 | |
| 3627 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3628 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3629 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3630 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3631 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3632 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
| 3633 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3634 | |
| 3635 **Updates**:: | |
| 3636 | |
| 3637 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3638 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3639 | |
| 3640 **Examples**:: | |
| 3641 | |
| 3642 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3643 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3644 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3645 | | %b0: | |
| 3646 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 9> | %v0 = ashr i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3647 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 9> | %v1 = ashr i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3648 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3649 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3650 | |
| 3651 Logical And | |
| 3652 ----------- | |
| 3653 | |
| 3654 The *and* instruction returns the bitwise logical and of its two operands. | |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 %vN = and T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3659 | |
| 3660 **Record**:: | |
| 3661 | |
| 3662 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 10> | |
| 3663 | |
| 3664 **Semantics**: | |
| 3665 | |
| 3666 This instruction performs a bitwise logical and of its arguments. Arguments | |
| 3667 ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a n | |
| 3668 integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
| 3669 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. ``A`` is the | |
| 3670 (optional) abbreviation associated with the corresponding record. | |
| 3671 | |
| 3672 The truth table used for the *and* instruction is: | |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3675 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
| 3676 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3677 0 0 0 | |
| 3678 0 1 0 | |
| 3679 1 0 0 | |
| 3680 1 1 1 | |
| 3681 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3682 | |
| 3683 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3686 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3687 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3688 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3689 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
| 3690 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3691 | |
| 3692 **Updates**:: | |
| 3693 | |
| 3694 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3695 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3696 | |
| 3697 **Examples**:: | |
| 3698 | |
| 3699 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3700 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3701 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3702 | | %b0: | |
| 3703 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 10> | %v0 = and i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3704 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 10> | %v1 = and i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3705 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3706 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 Logical Or | |
| 3709 ---------- | |
| 3710 | |
| 3711 The *or* instruction returns the bitwise logical inclusive or of its | |
| 3712 two operands. | |
| 3713 | |
| 3714 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3715 | |
| 3716 %vN = or T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3717 | |
| 3718 **Record**:: | |
| 3719 | |
| 3720 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 11> | |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 **Semantics**: | |
| 3723 | |
| 3724 This instruction performs a bitwise logical inclusive or of its arguments. | |
| 3725 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
| 3726 must be an integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
| 3727 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3728 | |
| 3729 The truth table used for the *or* instruction is: | |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3732 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
| 3733 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3734 0 0 0 | |
| 3735 0 1 1 | |
| 3736 1 0 1 | |
| 3737 1 1 1 | |
| 3738 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3739 | |
| 3740 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3741 | |
| 3742 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3743 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3744 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3745 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3746 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
| 3747 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3748 | |
| 3749 **Updates**:: | |
| 3750 | |
| 3751 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3752 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3753 | |
| 3754 **Examples**:: | |
| 3755 | |
| 3756 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3757 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3758 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3759 | | %b0: | |
| 3760 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 11> | %v0 = or i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3761 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 11> | %v1 = or i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3762 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3763 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3764 | |
| 3765 Logical Xor | |
| 3766 ----------- | |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 The *xor* instruction returns the bitwise logical exclusive or of its | |
| 3769 two operands. | |
| 3770 | |
| 3771 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3772 | |
| 3773 %vN = xor T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3774 | |
| 3775 **Record**:: | |
| 3776 | |
| 3777 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 12> | |
| 3778 | |
| 3779 **Semantics**: | |
| 3780 | |
| 3781 This instruction performs a bitwise logical exclusive or of its arguments. | |
| 3782 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
| 3783 must be an integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
| 3784 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
| 3785 | |
| 3786 The truth table used for the *or* instruction is: | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
xor
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
| 3787 | |
| 3788 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3789 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
| 3790 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3791 0 0 0 | |
| 3792 0 1 1 | |
| 3793 1 0 1 | |
| 3794 1 1 0 | |
| 3795 ===== ===== ====== | |
| 3796 | |
| 3797 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3798 | |
| 3799 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3800 A1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3801 A2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3802 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3803 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
| 3804 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3805 | |
| 3806 **Updates**:: | |
| 3807 | |
| 3808 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3809 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3810 | |
| 3811 **Examples**:: | |
| 3812 | |
| 3813 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 3814 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3815 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3816 | | %b0: | |
| 3817 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 12> | %v0 = xor i32 %p0, %p1; | |
| 3818 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 12> | %v1 = xor i32 %v0, %p1; | |
| 3819 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
| 3820 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3821 | |
| 3822 .. _link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions: | |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 Floating Point Binary Instructions | |
| 3825 ================================== | |
| 3826 | |
| 3827 Floating point binary instructions require two operands of the same type, | |
| 3828 execute an operation on them, and produce a value. The value may represent | |
| 3829 multiple values if the type is a vector type. The result value always has the | |
| 3830 same type as its operands. | |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 Floating Point Add | |
| 3833 ------------------ | |
| 3834 | |
| 3835 The floating point add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Both | |
| 3836 arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be a floating | |
| 3837 point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
| 3838 | |
| 3839 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3840 | |
| 3841 %vN = fadd T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 **Record**:: | |
| 3844 | |
| 3845 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 0> | |
| 3846 | |
| 3847 **Semantics**: | |
| 3848 | |
| 3849 The floating point add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. | |
| 3850 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2`` and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
| 3851 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. ``N`` is | |
| 3852 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
| 3853 the instruction. | |
| 3854 | |
| 3855 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3856 | |
| 3857 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3858 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3859 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3860 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3861 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3862 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3863 | |
| 3864 **Updates**:: | |
| 3865 | |
| 3866 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3867 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3868 | |
| 3869 **Examples**:: | |
| 3870 | |
| 3871 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 3872 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
| 3873 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3874 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3875 | | %b0: | |
| 3876 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = fadd float %p0, %p1; | |
| 3877 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = fadd float %p0, %v0; | |
| 3878 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
| 3879 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3880 | |
| 3881 Floating Point Subtract | |
| 3882 ----------------------- | |
| 3883 | |
| 3884 The floating point subtract instruction returns the difference of its two | |
| 3885 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
| 3886 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
| 3887 | |
| 3888 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3889 | |
| 3890 %vN = fsub T V1, V2; <a> | |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 **Record**:: | |
| 3893 | |
| 3894 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 1> | |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 **Semantics**: | |
| 3897 | |
| 3898 The floating point subtract instruction returns the difference of its two | |
| 3899 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
| 3900 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
| 3901 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
| 3902 generated by the instruction. | |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3905 | |
| 3906 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3907 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3908 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3909 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3910 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3911 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3912 | |
| 3913 **Updates**:: | |
| 3914 | |
| 3915 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3916 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3917 | |
| 3918 **Examples**:: | |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 3921 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
| 3922 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3923 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3924 | | %b0: | |
| 3925 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 1> | %v0 = fsub float %p0, %p1; | |
| 3926 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 1> | %v1 = fsub float %p0, %v0; | |
| 3927 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
| 3928 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3929 | |
| 3930 Floating Point Multiply | |
| 3931 ----------------------- | |
| 3932 | |
| 3933 The floating point multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
| 3934 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
| 3935 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
| 3936 | |
| 3937 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3938 | |
| 3939 &vN = fmul T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3940 | |
| 3941 **Record**:: | |
| 3942 | |
| 3943 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 2> | |
| 3944 | |
| 3945 **Semantics**: | |
| 3946 | |
| 3947 The floating point multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
| 3948 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
| 3949 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
| 3950 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
| 3951 generated by the instruction. | |
| 3952 | |
| 3953 **Constraints**:: | |
| 3954 | |
| 3955 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 3956 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 3957 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 3958 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 3959 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 3960 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 3961 | |
| 3962 **Updates**:: | |
| 3963 | |
| 3964 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 3965 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 3966 | |
| 3967 **Examples**:: | |
| 3968 | |
| 3969 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 3970 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
| 3971 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 3972 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 3973 | | %b0: | |
| 3974 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = fmul float %p0, %p1; | |
| 3975 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 2> | %v1 = fmul float %p0, %v0; | |
| 3976 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
| 3977 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 Floating Point Divide | |
| 3980 --------------------- | |
| 3981 | |
| 3982 The floating point divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
| 3983 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
| 3984 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
| 3985 | |
| 3986 **Syntax**:: | |
| 3987 | |
| 3988 %vN = fdiv T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 3989 | |
| 3990 **Record**:: | |
| 3991 | |
| 3992 AA: <2, V1, V2, 4> | |
| 3993 | |
| 3994 **Semantics**: | |
| 3995 | |
| 3996 The floating point divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
| 3997 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
| 3998 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
| 3999 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
| 4000 generated by the instruction. | |
| 4001 | |
| 4002 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4005 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 4006 VV22 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 4007 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 4008 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 4009 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4010 | |
| 4011 **Updates**:: | |
| 4012 | |
| 4013 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4014 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
| 4015 | |
| 4016 **Examples**:: | |
| 4017 | |
| 4018 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 4019 | | double | |
| 4020 | | @f0(double %p0, double %p1) { | |
| 4021 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4022 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4023 | | %b0: | |
| 4024 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 4> | %v0 = fdiv double %p0, %p1; | |
| 4025 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 4> | %v1 = fdiv double %p0, %v0; | |
| 4026 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v1; | |
| 4027 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 Floating Point Remainder | |
| 4030 ------------------------ | |
| 4031 | |
| 4032 The floating point remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 4033 of its two arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same | |
| 4034 type. That type must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
| 4035 type. | |
| 4036 | |
| 4037 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 %vN = frem T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 4040 | |
| 4041 **Record**:: | |
| 4042 | |
| 4043 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 6> | |
| 4044 | |
| 4045 **Semantics**: | |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 The floating point remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
| 4048 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must b e of | |
| 4049 type ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
| 4050 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
| 4051 generated by the instruction. | |
| 4052 | |
| 4053 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4054 | |
| 4055 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4056 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 4057 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 4058 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 4059 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 4060 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4061 | |
| 4062 **Updates**:: | |
| 4063 | |
| 4064 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4065 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
| 4066 | |
| 4067 **Examples**:: | |
| 4068 | |
| 4069 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 4070 | | double | |
| 4071 | | @f0(double %p0, double %p1) { | |
| 4072 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4073 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4074 | | %b0: | |
| 4075 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 6> | %v0 = frem double %p0, %p1; | |
| 4076 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 6> | %v1 = frem double %p0, %v0; | |
| 4077 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v1; | |
| 4078 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4079 | |
| 4080 .. _link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions: | |
| 4081 | |
| 4082 Memory Creation and Access Instructions | |
| 4083 ======================================= | |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 A key design point of SSA-based representation is how it represents | |
| 4086 memory. In PNaCl bitcode files, no memory locations are in SSA | |
| 4087 form. This makes things very simple. | |
| 4088 | |
| 4089 .. _link_for_alloca_instruction: | |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 Alloca Instruction | |
| 4092 ------------------ | |
| 4093 | |
| 4094 The *alloca* instruction allocates memory on the stack frame of the | |
| 4095 currently executing function. This memory is automatically released | |
| 4096 when the function returns to its caller. | |
| 4097 | |
| 4098 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4099 | |
| 4100 %vN = alloca i8, i32 S, align V; <A> | |
| 4101 | |
| 4102 **Record**:: | |
| 4103 | |
| 4104 AA: <19, SS, VV> | |
| 4105 | |
| 4106 **Semantics**: | |
| 4107 | |
| 4108 The *alloca* instruction allocates memory on the stack frame of the currently | |
| 4109 executing function. The resulting value is a pointer to the allocated memory | |
| 4110 (i.e. of type i32). ``S`` is the number of bytes that are allocated on the | |
| 4111 stack. ``S`` must be of integer type i32. ``V`` is the alignment of the generate d | |
| 4112 stack address. | |
| 4113 | |
| 4114 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
| 4115 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
| 4116 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
| 4117 | |
| 4118 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4119 | |
| 4120 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4121 VV == Log2(V+1) & | |
| 4122 SS == RelativeIndex(S) & | |
| 4123 i32 == TypeOf(S) & | |
| 4124 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4125 | |
| 4126 **Updates**:: | |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4129 TypeOf(%vN) = i32; | |
| 4130 | |
| 4131 **Examples**:: | |
| 4132 | |
| 4133 112:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1() { | |
| 4134 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4135 120:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4136 122:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4137 132:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 4138 134:4| 3: <4, 4> | %c0 = i32 2; | |
| 4139 137:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c1 = i32 4; | |
| 4140 139:4| 3: <4, 16> | %c2 = i32 8; | |
| 4141 142:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4142 | | %b0: | |
| 4143 144:0| 3: <19, 3, 1> | %v0 = alloca i8, i32 %c0, align 1; | |
| 4144 147:2| 3: <19, 3, 3> | %v1 = alloca i8, i32 %c1, align 4; | |
| 4145 150:4| 3: <19, 3, 4> | %v2 = alloca i8, i32 %c2, align 8; | |
| 4146 153:6| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4147 155:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4148 | |
| 4149 Load Instruction | |
| 4150 ---------------- | |
| 4151 | |
| 4152 The *load* instruction is used to read from memory. | |
| 4153 | |
| 4154 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4155 | |
| 4156 %vN = load T* P, align V; <A> | |
| 4157 | |
| 4158 **Record**:: | |
| 4159 | |
| 4160 AA: <20, PP, VV, TT> | |
| 4161 | |
| 4162 **Semantics**: | |
| 4163 | |
| 4164 The load instruction is used to read from memory. ``P`` is the identifier of the | |
| 4165 memory address to read. The type of ``P`` must be an ``i32``. ``T`` is the type | |
| 4166 of value to read. ``V`` is the alignment of the memory address. | |
| 4167 | |
| 4168 Type ``T`` must be a vector, integer, or floating point type. Both ``float`` and | |
| 4169 ``double`` types are allowed for floating point types. All integer types except i1 | |
| 4170 are allowed. | |
| 4171 | |
| 4172 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
| 4173 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
| 4174 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
| 4175 | |
| 4176 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4179 i32 == TypeOf(P) & | |
| 4180 PP == RelativeIndex(P) & | |
| 4181 VV == Log2(V+1) & | |
| 4182 %tTT == TypeID(T) & | |
| 4183 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4184 | |
| 4185 **Updates**:: | |
| 4186 | |
| 4187 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4188 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
| 4189 | |
| 4190 **Examples**:: | |
| 4191 | |
| 4192 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4193 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 4194 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4195 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 4196 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
| 4197 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
| 4198 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4199 ... | |
| 4200 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 4201 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4202 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4203 | | %b0: | |
| 4204 106:4| 3: <20, 1, 1, 0> | %v0 = load i32* %p0, align 1; | |
| 4205 110:4| 3: <20, 1, 4, 2> | %v1 = load double* %v0, align 8; | |
| 4206 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4207 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4208 | |
| 4209 Store Instruction | |
| 4210 ----------------- | |
| 4211 | |
| 4212 The *store* instruction is used to write to memory. | |
| 4213 | |
| 4214 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4215 | |
| 4216 store T S, T* P, align V; <A> | |
| 4217 | |
| 4218 **Record**:: | |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 AA: <24, PP, SS, VV> | |
| 4221 | |
| 4222 **Semantics**: | |
| 4223 | |
| 4224 The store instruction is used to write to memory. ``P`` is the identifier of the | |
| 4225 memory address to write to. The type of ``P`` must be an i32 integer. ``T`` is | |
| 4226 the type of value to store. ``S`` is the value to store, and must be of type | |
| 4227 ``T``. ``V`` is the alignment of the memory address. ``A`` is the (optional) | |
| 4228 abbreviation index associated with the record. | |
| 4229 | |
| 4230 Type ``T`` must be an integer or floating point type. Both ``float`` and | |
| 4231 ``double`` types are allowed for floating point types. All integer types except | |
| 4232 i1 are allowed. | |
| 4233 | |
| 4234 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
| 4235 alignment<link_for_memory_Blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
| 4236 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
| 4237 | |
| 4238 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4239 | |
| 4240 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4241 i32 == TypeOf(P) & | |
| 4242 PP == RelativeIndex(P) & | |
| 4243 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
| 4244 | |
| 4245 **Examples**:: | |
| 4246 | |
| 4247 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4248 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 4249 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4250 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 4251 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
| 4252 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 2>| @t3 = void (i32, i32, i32, double); | |
| 4253 63:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4254 ... | |
| 4255 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 4256 | | void | |
| 4257 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1, i32 %p2, | |
| 4258 | | double %p3) { | |
| 4259 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4260 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4261 | | %b0: | |
| 4262 106:4| 3: <24, 4, 3, 1> | store i32 %p1, i32* %p0, align 1; | |
| 4263 110:4| 3: <24, 2, 1, 4> | store double %p3, double* %p2, | |
| 4264 | | align 8; | |
| 4265 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4266 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4267 | |
| 4268 .. _link_for_conversion_instructions: | |
| 4269 | |
| 4270 Conversion Instructions | |
| 4271 ======================= | |
| 4272 | |
| 4273 Conversion instructions all take a single operand and a type. The value is | |
| 4274 converted to the corresponding type. | |
| 4275 | |
| 4276 Integer Truncating Instruction | |
| 4277 ------------------------------ | |
| 4278 | |
| 4279 The integer truncating instruction takes a value to truncate, and a type | |
| 4280 defining the truncated type. Both types must be integer types, or integer | |
| 4281 vectors with the same number of elements. The bit size of the value must be | |
| 4282 larger than the bit size of the destination type. Equal sized types are not | |
| 4283 allowed. | |
| 4284 | |
| 4285 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 %vN = trunc T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4288 | |
| 4289 **Record**:: | |
| 4290 | |
| 4291 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 0> | |
| 4292 | |
| 4293 **Semantics**: | |
| 4294 | |
| 4295 The integer truncating instruction takes a value ``V``, and truncates to type | |
| 4296 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
| 4297 same number of elements. ``T1`` has to be wider than ``T2``. If the value doesn 't | |
| 4298 fit in in ``T2``, then the higher order bits are dropped. | |
| 4299 | |
| 4300 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4301 | |
| 4302 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4303 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4304 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4305 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4306 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) > BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4307 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4308 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4309 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4310 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 **Updates**:: | |
| 4313 | |
| 4314 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4315 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4316 | |
| 4317 **Examples**:: | |
| 4318 | |
| 4319 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4320 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
| 4321 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4322 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 4323 55:4| 3: <7, 16> | @t2 = i16; | |
| 4324 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
| 4325 62:0| 3: <7, 8> | @t4 = i8; | |
| 4326 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4327 ... | |
| 4328 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 4329 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4330 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4331 | | %b0: | |
| 4332 110:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 0> | %v0 = trunc i32 %p0 to i16; | |
| 4333 114:4| 3: <3, 1, 4, 0> | %v1 = trunc i16 %v0 to i8; | |
| 4334 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4335 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4336 | |
| 4337 Floating Point Truncating Instruction | |
| 4338 -------------------------------------- | |
| 4339 | |
| 4340 The floating point truncating instruction takes a value to truncate, and a type | |
| 4341 defining the truncated type. Both types must be floating point types, or | |
| 4342 floating point vectors with the same number of elements. The source must be | |
| 4343 ``double`` while the destination is ``float``. If the source is a vector, the | |
| 4344 destination must also be vector with the same size as the source. | |
| 4345 | |
| 4346 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4347 | |
| 4348 %vN = fptrunc T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4349 | |
| 4350 **Record**:: | |
| 4351 | |
| 4352 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 7> | |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 **Semantics** | |
| 4355 | |
| 4356 The floating point truncating instruction takes a value ``V``, and truncates to | |
| 4357 type ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be floating point types, or floating | |
| 4358 point vectors with the same number of elements. ``T1`` must be defined on | |
| 4359 ``double`` while ``T2`` is defined on ``float``. If the value can't fit within | |
| 4360 the destination type ``T2``, the results are undefined. | |
| 4361 | |
| 4362 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4365 double == UnderlyingType(T1) & | |
| 4366 float == UnderlyingType(T2) & | |
| 4367 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4368 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4369 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) > BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4370 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4371 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4372 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4373 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4374 | |
| 4375 **Updates**:: | |
| 4376 | |
| 4377 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4378 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4379 | |
| 4380 **Examples**:: | |
| 4381 | |
| 4382 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4383 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 4384 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 4385 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
| 4386 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = float (double); | |
| 4387 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 4388 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4389 ... | |
| 4390 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function float @f0(double %p0) { | |
| 4391 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4392 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4393 | | %b0: | |
| 4394 102:4| 3: <3, 1, 0, 7> | %v0 = fptrunc double %p0 to float; | |
| 4395 106:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v0; | |
| 4396 109:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 | |
| 4399 Zero Extending Instruction | |
| 4400 -------------------------- | |
| 4401 | |
| 4402 The zero extending instruction takes a value to extend, and a type to extend it | |
| 4403 to. Both types must be integer types, or integer vectors with the same number | |
| 4404 of elements. The bit size of the source type must be smaller than the bit size | |
| 4405 of the destination type. Equal sized types are not allowed. | |
| 4406 | |
| 4407 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 %vN = zext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4410 | |
| 4411 **Record**:: | |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 1> | |
| 4414 | |
| 4415 | |
| 4416 **Semantics**: | |
| 4417 | |
| 4418 The zero extending instruction takes a value ``V``, and expands it to type | |
| 4419 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
| 4420 same number of elements. ``T2`` must be wider than ``T1``. | |
| 4421 | |
| 4422 The instruction fills the high order bits of the value with zero bits until it | |
| 4423 reaches the size of the destination type. When zero extending from i1, the | |
| 4424 result will always be either 0 or 1. | |
| 4425 | |
| 4426 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4429 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4430 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4431 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4432 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4433 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4434 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4435 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4436 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 **Updates**:: | |
| 4439 | |
| 4440 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4441 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4442 | |
| 4443 **Examples**:: | |
| 4444 | |
| 4445 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4446 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
| 4447 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
| 4448 53:6| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
| 4449 57:0| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t2 = i64 (); | |
| 4450 60:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t3 = i8; | |
| 4451 62:6| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
| 4452 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4453 ... | |
| 4454 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i64 @f0() { // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4455 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4456 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4457 120:0| 3: <1, 3> | i8: | |
| 4458 122:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i8 1; | |
| 4459 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4460 | | %b0: | |
| 4461 128:0| 3: <3, 1, 1, 1> | %v0 = zext i8 %c0 to i32; | |
| 4462 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 0, 1> | %v1 = zext i32 %v0 to i64; | |
| 4463 136:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i64 %v1; | |
| 4464 138:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4465 | |
| 4466 Sign Extending Instruction | |
| 4467 -------------------------- | |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 The sign extending instruction takes a value to cast, and a type to extend it | |
| 4470 to. Both types must be integer types, or integral vectors with the same number | |
| 4471 of elements. The bit size of the source type must be smaller than the bit size | |
| 4472 of the destination type. Equal sized types are not allowed. | |
| 4473 | |
| 4474 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4475 | |
| 4476 %vN = sext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4477 | |
| 4478 **Record**:: | |
| 4479 | |
| 4480 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 2> | |
| 4481 | |
| 4482 **Semantics**: | |
| 4483 | |
| 4484 The sign extending instruction takes a value ``V``, and expands it to type | |
| 4485 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
| 4486 same number of integers. ``T2`` has to be wider than ``T1``. | |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 When sign extending, the instruction fills the high order bits of the value with | |
| 4489 the (current) high order bit of the value. When sign extending from i1, the | |
| 4490 extension always results in -1 or 0. | |
| 4491 | |
| 4492 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4495 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4496 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4497 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4498 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4499 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4500 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4501 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4502 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4503 | |
| 4504 **Updates**:: | |
| 4505 | |
| 4506 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4507 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4508 | |
| 4509 **Examples**:: | |
| 4510 | |
| 4511 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4512 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
| 4513 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
| 4514 53:6| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
| 4515 57:0| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t2 = i64 (); | |
| 4516 60:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t3 = i8; | |
| 4517 62:6| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
| 4518 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4519 ... | |
| 4520 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i64 @f0() { // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4521 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4522 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4523 120:0| 3: <1, 3> | i8: | |
| 4524 122:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i8 -1; | |
| 4525 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4526 | | %b0: | |
| 4527 128:0| 3: <3, 1, 1, 2> | %v0 = sext i8 %c0 to i32; | |
| 4528 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 0, 2> | %v1 = sext i32 %v0 to i64; | |
| 4529 136:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i64 %v1; | |
| 4530 138:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4531 | |
| 4532 Floating Point Extending Instruction | |
| 4533 ------------------------------------ | |
| 4534 | |
| 4535 The floating point extending instruction takes a value to extend, and a type to | |
| 4536 extend it to. Both types must either be floating point types, or vectors of | |
| 4537 floating point types with the same number of elements. The source value must be | |
| 4538 ``float`` while the destination is ``double``. If the source is a vector, the | |
| 4539 destination must also be vector with the same size as the source. | |
| 4540 | |
| 4541 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4542 | |
| 4543 %vN = fpext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4544 | |
| 4545 **Record**:: | |
| 4546 | |
| 4547 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 8> | |
| 4548 | |
| 4549 **Semantics**: | |
| 4550 | |
| 4551 The floating point extending instruction converts floating point values. | |
| 4552 ``V`` is the value to extend, and ``T2`` is the type to extend it | |
| 4553 to. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be floating point types, or floating point | |
| 4554 vector types with the same number of floating point values. ``T1`` contains | |
| 4555 ``float`` while ``T2`` contains ``double``. | |
| 4556 | |
| 4557 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4558 | |
| 4559 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4560 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4561 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4562 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4563 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4564 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4565 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4566 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4567 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4568 | |
| 4569 **Updates**:: | |
| 4570 | |
| 4571 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4572 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 **Examples**:: | |
| 4575 | |
| 4576 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4577 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 4578 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
| 4579 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 4580 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
| 4581 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 4582 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4583 ... | |
| 4584 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function double @f0(float %p0) { | |
| 4585 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4586 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4587 | | %b0: | |
| 4588 102:4| 3: <3, 1, 0, 8> | %v0 = fpext float %p0 to double; | |
| 4589 106:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v0; | |
| 4590 109:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4591 | |
| 4592 Floating Point to Unsigned Integer Instruction | |
| 4593 ---------------------------------------------- | |
| 4594 | |
| 4595 The floating point to unsigned integer instruction converts floating point | |
| 4596 values to unsigned integers. | |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4599 | |
| 4600 %vN = fptoui T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4601 | |
| 4602 **Record**:: | |
| 4603 | |
| 4604 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 3> | |
| 4605 | |
| 4606 **Semantics**: | |
| 4607 | |
| 4608 The floating point to unsigned integer instruction converts floating point | |
| 4609 value(s) in ``V`` to its unsigned integer equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must | |
| 4610 be a floating point type, or a floating point vector type. ``T2`` must be an | |
| 4611 integer type, or an integer vector type. If either type is a vector type, they | |
| 4612 both must have the same number of elements. | |
| 4613 | |
| 4614 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4617 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4618 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4619 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4620 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4621 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4622 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4623 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4624 | |
| 4625 **Updates**:: | |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4628 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4629 | |
| 4630 **Examples**:: | |
| 4631 | |
| 4632 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4633 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
| 4634 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 4635 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
| 4636 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4637 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, double); | |
| 4638 60:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
| 4639 63:6| 3: <7, 16> | @t5 = i16; | |
| 4640 66:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4641 ... | |
| 4642 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 4643 | | void @f0(float %p0, double %p1) { | |
| 4644 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4645 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4646 | | %b0: | |
| 4647 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 3> | %v0 = fptoui float %p0 to i32; | |
| 4648 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 3> | %v1 = fptoui double %p1 to i16; | |
| 4649 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4650 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4651 | |
| 4652 Floating Point to Signed Integer Instruction | |
| 4653 -------------------------------------------- | |
| 4654 | |
| 4655 The floating point to signed integer instruction converts floating point | |
| 4656 values to signed integers. | |
| 4657 | |
| 4658 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4659 | |
| 4660 %vN = fptosi T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4661 | |
| 4662 **Record**:: | |
| 4663 | |
| 4664 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 4> | |
| 4665 | |
| 4666 **Semantics**: | |
| 4667 | |
| 4668 The floating point to signed integer instruction converts floating point value(s ) | |
| 4669 in ``V`` to its signed integer equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be a | |
| 4670 floating point type, or a floating point vector type. ``T2`` must be an integer | |
| 4671 type, or an integer vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must | |
| 4672 have the same number of elements. | |
| 4673 | |
| 4674 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4675 | |
| 4676 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4677 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4678 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4679 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4680 UnderlyingCount(T1) = UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4681 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4682 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4683 N = NumValuedInsts | |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 **Updates**:: | |
| 4686 | |
| 4687 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4688 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 **Examples**:: | |
| 4691 | |
| 4692 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4693 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
| 4694 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 4695 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
| 4696 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4697 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, double); | |
| 4698 60:4| 3: <7, 8> | @t4 = i8; | |
| 4699 63:0| 3: <7, 16> | @t5 = i16; | |
| 4700 65:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4701 ... | |
| 4702 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 4703 | | void @f0(float %p0, double %p1) { | |
| 4704 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4705 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4706 | | %b0: | |
| 4707 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 4> | %v0 = fptosi float %p0 to i8; | |
| 4708 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 4> | %v1 = fptosi double %p1 to i16; | |
| 4709 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4710 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4711 | |
| 4712 Unsigned Integer to Floating Point Instruction | |
| 4713 ---------------------------------------------- | |
| 4714 | |
| 4715 The unsigned integer to floating point instruction converts unsigned integers to | |
| 4716 floating point values. | |
| 4717 | |
| 4718 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4719 | |
| 4720 %vN = uitofp T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4721 | |
| 4722 **Record**:: | |
| 4723 | |
| 4724 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 5> | |
| 4725 | |
| 4726 **Semantics**: | |
| 4727 | |
| 4728 The unsigned integer to floating point instruction converts unsigned integer(s) to | |
| 4729 its floating point equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be an integer type, or | |
| 4730 a integer vector type. ``T2`` must be a floating point type, or a floating point | |
| 4731 vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must have the | |
| 4732 same number of elements. | |
| 4733 | |
| 4734 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4735 | |
| 4736 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4737 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4738 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4739 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4740 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4741 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4742 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4743 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4744 | |
| 4745 **Updates**:: | |
| 4746 | |
| 4747 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4748 TypeOf(%vN) == T2; | |
| 4749 | |
| 4750 **Examples**:: | |
| 4751 | |
| 4752 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4753 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 4754 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4755 53:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
| 4756 57:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4757 58:6| 3: <3> | @t3 = float; | |
| 4758 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t4 = void (i32, i64); | |
| 4759 65:2| 3: <7, 1> | @t5 = i1; | |
| 4760 67:6| 3: <4> | @t6 = double; | |
| 4761 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4762 ... | |
| 4763 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %p1) { | |
| 4764 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4765 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4766 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4767 124:0| 3: <1, 5> | i1: | |
| 4768 126:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
| 4769 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4770 | | %b0: | |
| 4771 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 6, 5> | %v0 = uitofp i1 %c0 to double; | |
| 4772 136:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 5> | %v1 = uitofp i32 %p0 to float; | |
| 4773 140:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 5> | %v2 = uitofp i64 %p1 to float; | |
| 4774 144:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4775 145:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4776 | |
| 4777 Signed Integer to Floating Point Instruction | |
| 4778 -------------------------------------------- | |
| 4779 | |
| 4780 The signed integer to floating point instruction converts signed integers to | |
| 4781 floating point values. | |
| 4782 | |
| 4783 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4784 | |
| 4785 %vN = sitofp T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4786 | |
| 4787 **Record**:: | |
| 4788 | |
| 4789 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 6> | |
| 4790 | |
| 4791 **Semantics**: | |
| 4792 | |
| 4793 The signed integer to floating point instruction converts signed integer(s) to i ts | |
| 4794 floating point equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be an integer type, or a | |
| 4795 integer vector type. ``T2`` must be a floating point type, or a floating point | |
| 4796 vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must have the | |
| 4797 same number of elements. | |
| 4798 | |
| 4799 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4800 | |
| 4801 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4802 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4803 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4804 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4805 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
| 4806 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
| 4807 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
| 4808 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4809 | |
| 4810 **Updates**:: | |
| 4811 | |
| 4812 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4813 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4814 | |
| 4815 **Examples**:: | |
| 4816 | |
| 4817 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4818 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
| 4819 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4820 53:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
| 4821 57:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4822 58:6| 3: <3> | @t3 = float; | |
| 4823 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t4 = void (i32, i64); | |
| 4824 65:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t5 = i8; | |
| 4825 67:6| 3: <4> | @t6 = double; | |
| 4826 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4827 ... | |
| 4828 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %p1) { | |
| 4829 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4830 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4831 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4832 124:0| 3: <1, 5> | i8: | |
| 4833 126:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i8 -1; | |
| 4834 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4835 | | %b0: | |
| 4836 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 6, 6> | %v0 = sitofp i8 %c0 to double; | |
| 4837 136:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 6> | %v1 = sitofp i32 %p0 to float; | |
| 4838 140:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 6> | %v2 = sitofp i64 %p1 to float; | |
| 4839 144:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4840 145:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4841 | |
| 4842 Bitcast Instruction | |
| 4843 ------------------- | |
| 4844 | |
| 4845 The bitcast instruction converts the type of the value without changing the bit | |
| 4846 contents of the value. The bit size of the type of the value must be the same as | |
| 4847 the bit size of the cast type. | |
| 4848 | |
| 4849 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4850 | |
| 4851 %vN = bitcast T1 V to T2; <A> | |
| 4852 | |
| 4853 **Record**:: | |
| 4854 | |
| 4855 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 11> | |
| 4856 | |
| 4857 **Semantics**: | |
| 4858 | |
| 4859 The bitcast instruction converts the type of value ``V`` to type ``T2``. ``T1`` | |
| 4860 and ``T2`` must be primitive types or vectors, and define the same number of | |
| 4861 bits. | |
| 4862 | |
| 4863 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4864 | |
| 4865 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4866 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
| 4867 VV = RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 4868 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
| 4869 BitSizeOf(T1) == BitSizeOf(T2) & | |
| 4870 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4871 | |
| 4872 **Updates**:: | |
| 4873 | |
| 4874 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4875 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
| 4876 | |
| 4877 **Examples**:: | |
| 4878 | |
| 4879 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4880 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
| 4881 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 4882 52:2| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
| 4883 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4884 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, i64); | |
| 4885 62:0| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
| 4886 65:2| 3: <4> | @t5 = double; | |
| 4887 67:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4888 ... | |
| 4889 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(float %p0, i64 %p1) | |
| 4890 | | { // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4891 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4892 | | %b0: | |
| 4893 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 11> | %v0 = bitcast float %p0 to i32; | |
| 4894 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 11> | %v1 = bitcast i64 %p1 to double; | |
| 4895 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4896 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4897 | |
| 4898 .. _link_for_compare_instructions: | |
| 4899 | |
| 4900 Comparison Instructions | |
| 4901 ======================= | |
| 4902 | |
| 4903 The comparison instructions compares values returns a boolean (i1) result for | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
... compare ...
... and return ...
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
| 4904 each pair of compared values. There are different comparison operations for | |
| 4905 integer and floating point values. | |
| 4906 | |
| 4907 | |
| 4908 Integer Comparison Instructions | |
| 4909 ------------------------------- | |
| 4910 | |
| 4911 The integer comparison instruction compares integer values and returns a | |
| 4912 boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values. | |
| 4913 | |
| 4914 **Syntax**:: | |
| 4915 | |
| 4916 %vN = icmp C T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 4917 | |
| 4918 **Record**:: | |
| 4919 | |
| 4920 AA: <9, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
| 4921 | |
| 4922 **Semantics**: | |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 The integer comparison instruction compares integer values and returns a boolean | |
| 4925 (i1) result for each pair of compared values in ``V1`` and ``V2``. ``V1`` and | |
| 4926 ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer | |
| 4927 vector type. Condition code ``C`` is the condition applied to all elements in | |
| 4928 ``V1`` and ``V2``. Each comparison always yields an i1. If ``T`` is a primitive | |
| 4929 type, the resulting type is i1. If ``T`` is a vector, then the resulting type is | |
| 4930 a vector of i1 with the same size as ``T``. | |
| 4931 | |
| 4932 Legal test conditions are: | |
| 4933 | |
| 4934 === == ============================== | |
| 4935 C CC Operator | |
| 4936 === == ============================== | |
| 4937 eq 32 equal | |
| 4938 ne 33 not equal | |
| 4939 ugt 34 unsigned greater than | |
| 4940 uge 35 unsigned greater than or equal | |
| 4941 ult 36 unsigned less than | |
| 4942 ule 37 unsigned less than or equal | |
| 4943 sgt 38 signed greater than | |
| 4944 sge 39 signed greater than or equal | |
| 4945 slt 40 signed less than | |
| 4946 sle 41 signed less than or equal | |
| 4947 === == ============================== | |
| 4948 | |
| 4949 **Constraints**:: | |
| 4950 | |
| 4951 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 4952 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T) & | |
| 4953 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 4954 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 4955 | |
| 4956 **Updates**:: | |
| 4957 | |
| 4958 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 4959 if IsVector(T) then | |
| 4960 TypeOf(%vN) = <UnderlyingCount(T), i1> | |
| 4961 else | |
| 4962 TypeOf(%vN) = i1 | |
| 4963 endif | |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 **Examples**:: | |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 4968 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 4969 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 4970 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
| 4971 56:2| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 4972 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
| 4973 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4974 ... | |
| 4975 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 4976 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 4977 116:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 4978 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 4979 128:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 4980 130:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i32 0; | |
| 4981 133:0| 3: <4, 2> | %c1 = i32 1; | |
| 4982 135:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4983 | | %b0: | |
| 4984 136:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 32> | %v0 = icmp eq i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4985 140:6| 3: <28, 3, 2, 33> | %v1 = icmp ne i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4986 145:4| 3: <28, 4, 3, 34> | %v2 = icmp ugt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4987 150:2| 3: <28, 5, 4, 36> | %v3 = icmp ult i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4988 155:0| 3: <28, 6, 5, 37> | %v4 = icmp ule i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4989 159:6| 3: <28, 7, 6, 38> | %v5 = icmp sgt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4990 164:4| 3: <28, 8, 7, 38> | %v6 = icmp sgt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4991 169:2| 3: <28, 9, 8, 39> | %v7 = icmp sge i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4992 174:0| 3: <28, 10, 9, 40> | %v8 = icmp slt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4993 178:6| 3: <28, 11, 10, 41> | %v9 = icmp sle i32 %c0, %c1; | |
| 4994 183:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 4995 185:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 4996 | |
| 4997 | |
| 4998 Floating Point Comparison Instructions | |
| 4999 -------------------------------------- | |
| 5000 | |
| 5001 The floating point comparison instruction compares floating point values and | |
| 5002 returns a boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values. | |
| 5003 | |
| 5004 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5005 | |
| 5006 %vN = fcmp C T V1, V2; <A> | |
| 5007 | |
| 5008 **Record**:: | |
| 5009 | |
| 5010 AA: <9, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
| 5011 | |
| 5012 **Semantics**: | |
| 5013 | |
| 5014 The floating point comparison instruction compares floating point values and | |
| 5015 returns a boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values in ``V1`` and | |
| 5016 ``V2``. ``V1`` and ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point | |
| 5017 type, or a floating point vector type. Condition code ``C`` is the condition | |
| 5018 applied to all elements in ``V1`` and ``V2``. Each comparison always yields an | |
| 5019 i1. If ``T`` is a primitive type, the resulting type is i1. If ``T`` is a | |
| 5020 vector, then the resulting type is a vector of i1 with the same size as ``T``. | |
| 5021 | |
| 5022 Legal test conditions are: | |
| 5023 | |
| 5024 ===== == ================================== | |
| 5025 C CC Operator | |
| 5026 ===== == ================================== | |
| 5027 false 0 Always false | |
| 5028 oeq 1 Ordered and equal | |
| 5029 ogt 2 Ordered and greater than | |
| 5030 oge 3 Ordered and greater than or equal | |
| 5031 olt 4 Ordered and less than | |
| 5032 ole 5 Ordered and less than or equal | |
| 5033 one 6 Ordered and not equal | |
| 5034 ord 7 Ordered (no nans) | |
|
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
For these two lines, maybe write "NaNs" instead of
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
| 5035 uno 8 Unordered (either nans) | |
| 5036 ueq 9 Unordered or equal | |
| 5037 ugt 10 Unordered or greater than | |
| 5038 uge 11 Unordered or greater than or equal | |
| 5039 ult 12 Unordered or less than | |
| 5040 ule 13 Unordered or less than or equal | |
| 5041 une 14 Unordered or not equal | |
| 5042 true 15 Always true | |
| 5043 ===== == ================================== | |
| 5044 | |
| 5045 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5046 | |
| 5047 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5048 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T) & | |
| 5049 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 5050 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5051 | |
| 5052 **Updates**:: | |
| 5053 | |
| 5054 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5055 if IsVector(T) then | |
| 5056 TypeOf(%vN) = <UnderlyingCount(T), i1> | |
| 5057 else | |
| 5058 TypeOf(%vN) = i1 | |
| 5059 endif | |
| 5060 | |
| 5061 **Examples**:: | |
| 5062 | |
| 5063 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5064 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 5065 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
| 5066 52:2| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
| 5067 54:6| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
| 5068 56:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
| 5069 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5070 ... | |
| 5071 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 5072 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5073 116:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5074 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5075 128:0| 3: <1, 0> | float: | |
| 5076 130:4| 3: <6, 0> | %c0 = float 0; | |
| 5077 133:0| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c1 = float 1; | |
| 5078 139:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5079 | | %b0: | |
| 5080 140:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = fcmp false float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5081 144:0| 3: <28, 3, 2, 1> | %v1 = fcmp oeq float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5082 148:0| 3: <28, 4, 3, 2> | %v2 = fcmp ogt float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5083 152:0| 3: <28, 5, 4, 3> | %v3 = fcmp oge float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5084 156:0| 3: <28, 6, 5, 4> | %v4 = fcmp olt float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5085 160:0| 3: <28, 7, 6, 5> | %v5 = fcmp ole float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5086 164:0| 3: <28, 8, 7, 6> | %v6 = fcmp one float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5087 168:0| 3: <28, 9, 8, 7> | %v7 = fcmp ord float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5088 172:0| 3: <28, 10, 9, 9> | %v8 = fcmp ueq float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5089 176:0| 3: <28, 11, 10, 10> | %v9 = fcmp ugt float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5090 180:0| 3: <28, 12, 11, 11> | %v10 = fcmp uge float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5091 184:0| 3: <28, 13, 12, 12> | %v11 = fcmp ult float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5092 188:0| 3: <28, 14, 13, 13> | %v12 = fcmp ule float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5093 192:0| 3: <28, 15, 14, 14> | %v13 = fcmp une float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5094 196:0| 3: <28, 16, 15, 8> | %v14 = fcmp uno float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5095 200:0| 3: <28, 17, 16, 15> | %v15 = fcmp true float %c0, %c1; | |
| 5096 204:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5097 205:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5098 208:0|0: <65534> |} | |
| 5099 | |
| 5100 .. _link_for_vector_instructions: | |
| 5101 | |
| 5102 Vector Instructions | |
| 5103 =================== | |
| 5104 | |
| 5105 PNaClAsm supports several instructions that process vectors. This includes the | |
| 5106 :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and :ref:`floating | |
| 5107 point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary instructions as well | |
| 5108 as :ref:`compare<link_for_compare_instructions>` instructions. These | |
| 5109 instructions work with vectors and generate resulting (new) vectors. This | |
| 5110 section introduces the instructions to construct vectors and extract results. | |
| 5111 | |
| 5112 .. _link_for_insert_element_instruction_section: | |
| 5113 | |
| 5114 Insert Element Instruction | |
| 5115 -------------------------- | |
| 5116 | |
| 5117 The *insert element* instruction inserts a scalar value into a vector at a | |
| 5118 specified index. The *insert element* instruction takes an existing vector and | |
| 5119 puts a scalar value in one of the elements of the vector. | |
| 5120 | |
| 5121 The *insert element* instruction can be used to construct a vector, one element | |
| 5122 at a time. At first glance, it may appear that one can't construct a vector, | |
| 5123 since the *insert element* instruction needs a vector to insert elements into. | |
| 5124 | |
| 5125 The key to understanding vector construction is understand that one can create | |
| 5126 an :ref:`undefined<link_for_undefined_literal>` vector literal. Using that | |
| 5127 constant as a starting point, one can built up the wanted vector by a sequence | |
| 5128 of *insert element* instructions. | |
| 5129 | |
| 5130 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5131 | |
| 5132 %vN = insertelement TV V, TE E, i32 I; <A> | |
| 5133 | |
| 5134 **Record**:: | |
| 5135 | |
| 5136 AA: <7, VV, EE, II> | |
| 5137 | |
| 5138 **Semantics**: | |
| 5139 | |
| 5140 The *insert element* instruction inserts scalar value ``E`` into index ``I`` of | |
| 5141 vector ``V``. ``%vN`` holds the updated vector. Type ``TV`` is the type of | |
| 5142 vector. It is also the type of updated vector ``%vN``. Type ``TE`` is the type | |
| 5143 of scalar value ``E`` and must be the element type of vector ``V``. ``I`` must | |
| 5144 be an :ref:`i32 literal<link_for_integer_literal>`. | |
| 5145 | |
| 5146 If ``I`` exceeds the length of ``V``, the result is undefined. | |
| 5147 | |
| 5148 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5149 | |
| 5150 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5151 IsVector(TV) & | |
| 5152 TypeOf(V) == TV & | |
| 5153 UnderlyingType(TV) == TE & | |
| 5154 TypeOf(I) == i32 & | |
| 5155 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5156 | |
| 5157 **Updates**:: | |
| 5158 | |
| 5159 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5160 TypeOf(%vN) = TV; | |
| 5161 | |
| 5162 **Examples**:: | |
| 5163 | |
| 5164 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5165 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
| 5166 50:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t0 = i1; | |
| 5167 53:0| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t1 = <4 x i1>; | |
| 5168 56:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t2 = i32; | |
| 5169 59:4| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
| 5170 61:2| 3: <21, 0, 3> | @t4 = void (); | |
| 5171 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5172 ... | |
| 5173 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 5174 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5175 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5176 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5177 136:0| 3: <1, 0> | i1: | |
| 5178 138:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i1 0; | |
| 5179 141:0| 3: <4, 3> | %c1 = i1 1; | |
| 5180 143:4| 3: <1, 1> | <4 x i1>: | |
| 5181 146:0| 3: <3> | %c2 = <4 x i1> undef; | |
| 5182 147:6| 3: <1, 2> | i32: | |
| 5183 150:2| 3: <4, 0> | %c3 = i32 0; | |
| 5184 152:6| 3: <4, 2> | %c4 = i32 1; | |
| 5185 155:2| 3: <4, 4> | %c5 = i32 2; | |
| 5186 157:6| 3: <4, 6> | %c6 = i32 3; | |
| 5187 160:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5188 | | %b0: | |
| 5189 164:0| 3: <7, 5, 7, 4> | %v0 = insertelement <4 x i1> %c2, | |
| 5190 | | i1 %c0, i32 %c3; | |
| 5191 168:0| 3: <7, 1, 7, 4> | %v1 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v0, | |
| 5192 | | i1 %c1, i32 %c4; | |
| 5193 172:0| 3: <7, 1, 9, 4> | %v2 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v1, | |
| 5194 | | i1 %c0, i32 %c5; | |
| 5195 176:0| 3: <7, 1, 9, 4> | %v3 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v2, | |
| 5196 | | i1 %c1, i32 %c6; | |
| 5197 180:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5198 181:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5199 | |
| 5200 Extract Element Instruction | |
| 5201 --------------------------- | |
| 5202 | |
| 5203 The *extract element* instruction extracts a single scalar value from a vector | |
| 5204 at a specified index. | |
| 5205 | |
| 5206 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5207 | |
| 5208 %vN = extractelement TV V, i32 I; <A> | |
| 5209 | |
| 5210 **Record**:: | |
| 5211 | |
| 5212 AA: <6, VV, II> | |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 **Semantics**: | |
| 5215 | |
| 5216 The *extract element* instruction extracts the scalar value at index ``I`` from | |
| 5217 vector ``V``. The extracted value is assigned to ``%vN``. Type ``TV`` is the | |
| 5218 type of vector ``V``. ``I`` must be an :ref:`i32 | |
| 5219 literal<link_for_integer_literal>`. The type of ``vN`` must be the element type | |
| 5220 of vector ``V``. | |
| 5221 | |
| 5222 If ``I`` exceeds the length of ``V``, the result is undefined. | |
| 5223 | |
| 5224 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5225 | |
| 5226 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5227 IsVector(TV) & | |
| 5228 TypeOf(V) == TV & | |
| 5229 TypeOf(I) == i32 & | |
| 5230 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5231 | |
| 5232 **Updates**:: | |
| 5233 | |
| 5234 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5235 TypeOf(%vN) = UnderlyingType(TV); | |
| 5236 | |
| 5237 **Examples**:: | |
| 5238 | |
| 5239 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(<4 x i32> %p0) { | |
| 5240 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5241 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5242 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5243 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 5244 118:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i32 0; | |
| 5245 121:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5246 | | %b0: | |
| 5247 124:0| 3: <6, 2, 1> | %v0 = | |
| 5248 | | extractelement <4 x i32> %p0, | |
| 5249 | | i32 %c0; | |
| 5250 127:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5251 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5252 | |
| 5253 .. _link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions: | |
| 5254 | |
| 5255 Other Instructions | |
| 5256 ================== | |
| 5257 | |
| 5258 This section defines miscellaneous instructions which defy better | |
| 5259 classification. | |
| 5260 | |
| 5261 .. _link_for_forward_type_declaration_section: | |
| 5262 | |
| 5263 Forward Type Declaration | |
| 5264 ------------------------ | |
| 5265 | |
| 5266 The forward type declaration exists to deal with the fact that all instruction | |
| 5267 values must have a type associated with them before they are used. For some | |
| 5268 simple functions one can easily topologically sort instructions so that | |
| 5269 instruction values are defined before they are used. However, if the | |
| 5270 implementation contains loops, the loop induced values can't be defined before | |
| 5271 they are used. | |
| 5272 | |
| 5273 The solution is to forward declare the type of an instruction value. One could | |
| 5274 forward declare the types of all instructions at the beginning of the function | |
| 5275 block. However, this would make the corresponding file size considerably | |
| 5276 larger. Rather, one should only generate these forward type declarations | |
| 5277 sparingly and only when needed. | |
| 5278 | |
| 5279 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5280 | |
| 5281 declare T %vN; <A> | |
| 5282 | |
| 5283 **Record**:: | |
| 5284 | |
| 5285 AA: <43, N, TT> | |
| 5286 | |
| 5287 **Semantics**: | |
| 5288 | |
| 5289 The forward declare type declaration defines the type to be associated with a | |
| 5290 (not yet defined) instruction value ``%vN``. ``T`` is the type of the value | |
| 5291 generated by the ``Nth`` value generating instruction in the function block. | |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 Note: It is an error to define the type of ``%vN`` with a different type than | |
| 5294 will be generated by the ``Nth`` value generating instruction in the function | |
| 5295 block. | |
| 5296 | |
| 5297 Also note that this construct is a declaration and not considered an | |
| 5298 instruction, even though it appears in the list of instruction records. Hence, | |
| 5299 they may appear before and between :ref:`phi<link_for_phi_instruction_section>` | |
| 5300 instructions in a basic block. | |
| 5301 | |
| 5302 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5303 | |
| 5304 AA = AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5305 TT = TypeID(T) | |
| 5306 | |
| 5307 **Updates**:: | |
| 5308 | |
| 5309 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
| 5310 | |
| 5311 **Examples**:: | |
| 5312 | |
| 5313 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5314 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 5315 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 5316 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 5317 55:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t2 = i1; | |
| 5318 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
| 5319 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5320 ... | |
| 5321 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 5322 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5323 116:0| 3: <1, 7> | blocks 7; | |
| 5324 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5325 128:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
| 5326 130:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
| 5327 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5328 | | %b0: | |
| 5329 136:0| 3: <11, 4> | br label %b4; | |
| 5330 | | %b1: | |
| 5331 138:4| 3: <43, 6, 0> | declare i32 %v3; | |
| 5332 142:4| 3: <2, 2, 4294967293, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %v3; | |
| 5333 151:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
| 5334 | | %b2: | |
| 5335 153:4| 3: <43, 7, 0> | declare i32 %v4; | |
| 5336 157:4| 3: <2, 3, 4294967293, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v4; | |
| 5337 166:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
| 5338 | | %b3: | |
| 5339 168:4| 3: <2, 4, 4294967295, 0> | %v2 = add i32 %p0, %v3; | |
| 5340 177:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
| 5341 | | %b4: | |
| 5342 179:4| 3: <2, 5, 5, 0> | %v3 = add i32 %p0, %p0; | |
| 5343 183:4| 3: <11, 1, 5, 5> | br i1 %c0, label %b1, label %b5; | |
| 5344 | | %b5: | |
| 5345 187:4| 3: <2, 1, 6, 0> | %v4 = add i32 %v3, %p0; | |
| 5346 191:4| 3: <11, 2, 3, 6> | br i1 %c0, label %b2, label %b3; | |
| 5347 | | %b6: | |
| 5348 195:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5349 197:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5350 | |
| 5351 .. _link_for_phi_instruction_section: | |
| 5352 | |
| 5353 Phi Instruction | |
| 5354 --------------- | |
| 5355 | |
| 5356 The *phi* instruction is used to implement phi nodes in the SSA graph | |
| 5357 representing the function. Phi instructions can only appear at the beginning of | |
| 5358 a basic block. There must be no non-phi instructions (other than forward type | |
| 5359 declarations) between the start of the basic block and the *phi* instruction. | |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 To clarify the origin of each incoming value, the incoming value is associated | |
| 5362 with the incoming edge from the corresponding predecessor block that the | |
| 5363 incoming value comes from. | |
| 5364 | |
| 5365 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5366 | |
| 5367 %vN = phi T [V1, %bB1], ... , [VM, %bBM]; <A> | |
| 5368 | |
| 5369 **Record**:: | |
| 5370 | |
| 5371 AA: <16, TT, VV1, B1, ..., VVM, BM> | |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 **Semantics**: | |
| 5374 | |
| 5375 The phi instruction is used to implement phi nodes in the SSA graph representing | |
| 5376 the function. ``%vN`` is the resulting value of the corresponding phi node. ``T` ` is | |
| 5377 the type of the phi node. Values ``V1`` through ``VM`` are the reaching definiti ons | |
| 5378 for the phi node while ``%bB1`` through ``%bBM`` are the corresponding predecess or | |
| 5379 blocks. Each ``VI`` reaches via the incoming predecessor edge from block ``%bBI `` | |
| 5380 (for 1 <= I <= M). Type ``T`` must be the type associated with each ``VI``. | |
| 5381 | |
| 5382 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5383 | |
| 5384 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5385 M > 1 & | |
| 5386 TT == TypeID(T) & | |
| 5387 T = TypeOf(VI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5388 BI < ExpectedBasicBlocks for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5389 VVI = SignRotate(RelativeIndex(VI)) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5390 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5391 | |
| 5392 **Updates**:: | |
| 5393 | |
| 5394 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5395 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
| 5396 | |
| 5397 **Examples**:: | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5400 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
| 5401 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 5402 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
| 5403 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (); | |
| 5404 58:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t3 = i1; | |
| 5405 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5406 ... | |
| 5407 112:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
| 5408 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5409 120:0| 3: <1, 4> | blocks 4; | |
| 5410 122:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5411 132:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
| 5412 134:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
| 5413 137:0| 3: <1, 3> | i1: | |
| 5414 139:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
| 5415 142:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5416 | | %b0: | |
| 5417 144:0| 3: <11, 1, 2, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b1, label %b2; | |
| 5418 | | %b1: | |
| 5419 148:0| 3: <2, 2, 2, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %c0, %c0; | |
| 5420 152:0| 3: <2, 3, 3, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %c0, %c0; | |
| 5421 156:0| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
| 5422 | | %b2: | |
| 5423 158:4| 3: <2, 4, 4, 2> | %v2 = mul i32 %c0, %c0; | |
| 5424 162:4| 3: <2, 5, 5, 3> | %v3 = udiv i32 %c0, %c0; | |
| 5425 166:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
| 5426 | | %b3: | |
| 5427 169:0| 3: <16, 0, 8, 1, 4, 2> | %v4 = phi i32 [%v0, %b1], | |
| 5428 | | [%v2, %b2]; | |
| 5429 174:4| 3: <16, 0, 8, 1, 4, 2> | %v5 = phi i32 [%v1, %b1], | |
| 5430 | | [%v3, %b2]; | |
| 5431 180:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5432 181:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5433 | |
| 5434 Select Instruction | |
| 5435 ------------------ | |
| 5436 | |
| 5437 The *select* instruction is used to choose between pairs of values, based on a | |
| 5438 condition, without PNaClAsm-level branching. | |
| 5439 | |
| 5440 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5441 | |
| 5442 %vN = select CT C, T V1, T V2; <A> | |
| 5443 | |
| 5444 **Record**:: | |
| 5445 | |
| 5446 AA: <29, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
| 5447 | |
| 5448 **Semantics**: | |
| 5449 | |
| 5450 The *select* instruction chooses pairs of values ``V1`` and ``V2``, based on | |
| 5451 condition value ``C``. The type ``CT`` of value ``C`` must either be an i1, or a | |
| 5452 vector of type i1. The type of values ``V1`` and ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. T ype | |
| 5453 ``T`` must either be a primitive type, or a vector of a primitive type. | |
| 5454 | |
| 5455 Both ``CT`` and ``T`` must be primitive types, or both must be vector types of t he | |
| 5456 same size. When the contents of ``C`` is 1, the corresponding value from ``V1`` will | |
| 5457 be chosen. Otherwise the corresponding value from ``V2`` will be chosen. | |
| 5458 | |
| 5459 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5460 | |
| 5461 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5462 CC == RelativeIndex(C) & | |
| 5463 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
| 5464 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
| 5465 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
| 5466 UnderlyingType(CT) == i1 & | |
| 5467 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) or IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
| 5468 UnderlyingCount(C) == UnderlyingCount(T) & | |
| 5469 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5470 | |
| 5471 **Updates**:: | |
| 5472 | |
| 5473 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5474 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
| 5475 | |
| 5476 **Examples**:: | |
| 5477 | |
| 5478 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
| 5479 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5480 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5481 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5482 116:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
| 5483 118:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
| 5484 121:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5485 | | %b0: | |
| 5486 124:0| 3: <29, 3, 2, 1> | %v0 = select i1 %c0, i32 %p0, | |
| 5487 | | i32 %p1; | |
| 5488 128:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v0; | |
| 5489 130:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5490 | |
| 5491 | |
| 5492 Call Instructions | |
| 5493 ----------------- | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 The *call* instruction does a function call. The call instruction is used to | |
| 5496 cause control flow to transfer to a specified routine, with its incoming | |
| 5497 arguments bound to the specified values. When a return instruction in the called | |
| 5498 function is reached, control flow continues with the instruction after the | |
| 5499 function call. If the call is to a function, the returned value is the value | |
| 5500 generated by the call instruction. Otherwise no result is defined by the call. | |
| 5501 | |
| 5502 If the *tail* flag is associated with the call instruction, then the :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 5503 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` is free to perform tail call | |
| 5504 optimization. That is, the *tail* flag is a hint that may be ignored by the | |
| 5505 PNaCl translator. | |
| 5506 | |
| 5507 There are two kinds of calls: *direct* and *indirect*. A *direct* call calls a | |
| 5508 defined :ref:`function address<link_for_function_address_section>` (i.e. a | |
| 5509 reference to a bitcode ID of the form ``%fF``). All other calls are *indirect*. | |
| 5510 | |
| 5511 Direct Procedure Call | |
| 5512 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
| 5513 | |
| 5514 The direct procedure call calls a defined :ref:`function | |
| 5515 address<link_for_function_address_section>` whose :ref:`type | |
| 5516 signature<link_for_function_type>` returns type void. | |
| 5517 | |
| 5518 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5519 | |
| 5520 TAIL call void @fF (T1 A1, ... , TN AN); <A> | |
| 5521 | |
| 5522 **Record**:: | |
| 5523 | |
| 5524 AA: <34, CC, F, AA1, ... , AAN> | |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 **Semantics**: | |
| 5527 | |
| 5528 The direct procedure call calls a define function address ``%fF`` whose type | |
| 5529 signature return type is void. The arguments ``A1`` through ``AN`` are passed | |
| 5530 in the order specified. The type of argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` (for all I, | |
| 5531 1 <=I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is included, it must be the | |
| 5532 literal ``tail``. | |
| 5533 | |
| 5534 The types of the arguments must match the corresponding types of the function | |
| 5535 signature associated with ``%fF``. The return type of ``%f`` must be void. | |
| 5536 | |
| 5537 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 ====== == | |
| 5540 TAIL CC | |
| 5541 ====== == | |
| 5542 "" 0 | |
| 5543 "tail" 1 | |
| 5544 ====== == | |
| 5545 | |
| 5546 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5547 | |
| 5548 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5549 N >= 0 & | |
| 5550 TypeOfFcn(%fF) == void (T1, ... , TN) & | |
| 5551 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= N | |
| 5552 | |
| 5553 **Updates**:: | |
| 5554 | |
| 5555 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5556 | |
| 5557 **Examples**:: | |
| 5558 | |
| 5559 72:0| 3: <8, 3, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
| 5560 | | void @f0(i32, i64, i32); | |
| 5561 ... | |
| 5562 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
| 5563 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5564 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5565 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5566 136:0| 3: <1, 2> | i64: | |
| 5567 138:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i64 1; | |
| 5568 141:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5569 | | %b0: | |
| 5570 144:0| 3: <34, 0, 4, 2, 1, 2> | call void | |
| 5571 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %c0, i32 %p0); | |
| 5572 150:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5573 152:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5574 | |
| 5575 Direct Function Call | |
| 5576 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
| 5577 | |
| 5578 The direct function call calls a defined function address whose type signature | |
| 5579 returns a value. | |
| 5580 | |
| 5581 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5582 | |
| 5583 %vN = TAIL call RT %fF (T1 A1, ... , TM AM); <A> | |
| 5584 | |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 **Record**:: | |
| 5587 | |
| 5588 AA: <34, CC, F, AA1, ... , AAM> | |
| 5589 | |
| 5590 **Semantics**: | |
| 5591 | |
| 5592 The direct function call calls a defined function address ``%fF`` whose type | |
| 5593 signature returned is not type void. The arguments ``A1`` through ``AM`` are | |
| 5594 passed in the order specified. The type of argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` | |
| 5595 (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is included, it must | |
| 5596 be the literal ``tail``. | |
| 5597 | |
| 5598 The types of the arguments must match the corresponding types of the function | |
| 5599 signature associated with ``%fF``. The return type must match ``RT``. | |
| 5600 | |
| 5601 Each parameter type ``TI``, and return type ``RT``, must either be a primitive t ype, | |
| 5602 or a vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it must either be | |
| 5603 i32 or i64. | |
| 5604 | |
| 5605 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
| 5606 | |
| 5607 ====== == | |
| 5608 TAIL CC | |
| 5609 ====== == | |
| 5610 "" 0 | |
| 5611 "tail" 1 | |
| 5612 ====== == | |
| 5613 | |
| 5614 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5615 | |
| 5616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5617 N >= 0 & | |
| 5618 TypeOfFcn(%fF) == RT (T1, ... , TN) & | |
| 5619 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5620 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5621 IsFcnArgType(RT) & | |
| 5622 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5623 | |
| 5624 **Updates**:: | |
| 5625 | |
| 5626 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5627 TypeOf(%vN) = RT; | |
| 5628 | |
| 5629 **Examples**:: | |
| 5630 | |
| 5631 72:0| 3: <8, 2, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
| 5632 | | i32 @f0(i32, i64, i32); | |
| 5633 ... | |
| 5634 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
| 5635 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5636 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5637 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5638 136:0| 3: <1, 1> | i64: | |
| 5639 138:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i64 1; | |
| 5640 141:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5641 | | %b0: | |
| 5642 144:0| 3: <34, 0, 4, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = call i32 | |
| 5643 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %c0, i32 %p0); | |
| 5644 150:2| 3: <34, 1, 4, 1> | %v1 = tail call i32 @f1(i32 %v0); | |
| 5645 155:0| 3: <10, 2> | ret i32 %v0; | |
| 5646 157:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5647 | |
| 5648 Indirect Procedure Call | |
| 5649 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
| 5650 | |
| 5651 The indirect procedure call calls a function using an indirect function address, | |
| 5652 and whose type signature is assumed to return type void. It is different from | |
| 5653 the direct procedure call because we can't use the type signature of the | |
| 5654 corresponding direct function address to type check the construct. | |
| 5655 | |
| 5656 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5657 | |
| 5658 TAIL call void V (T1 A1, ... , TN AN); <A> | |
| 5659 | |
| 5660 **Record**:: | |
| 5661 | |
| 5662 AA: <44, CC, TV, VV, AA1, ... , AAN> | |
| 5663 | |
| 5664 **Semantics**: | |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 The indirect call procedure calls a function using value ``V`` that is an indire ct | |
| 5667 function address, and whose type signature is assumed to return type void. The | |
| 5668 arguments ``A1`` through ``AN`` are passed in the order specified. The type of | |
| 5669 argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is | |
| 5670 optional. If it is included, it must be the literal ``tail``. | |
| 5671 | |
| 5672 Each parameter type ``TI`` (1 <= I <= N) must either be a primitive type, or a | |
| 5673 vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it must either be i32 | |
| 5674 or i64. | |
| 5675 | |
| 5676 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
| 5677 | |
| 5678 ====== == | |
| 5679 TAIL CC | |
| 5680 ====== == | |
| 5681 "" 0 | |
| 5682 "tail" 1 | |
| 5683 ====== == | |
| 5684 | |
| 5685 The type signature of the called procedure is assumed to be:: | |
| 5686 | |
| 5687 void (T1, ... , TN) | |
| 5688 | |
| 5689 It isn't necessary to define this type in the :ref:`types | |
| 5690 block<link_for_types_block_section>`, since the type is inferred rather than | |
| 5691 used. | |
| 5692 | |
| 5693 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5694 | |
| 5695 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5696 N >= 0 & | |
| 5697 TV = TypeID(void) & | |
| 5698 AbsoluteIndex(V) >= NumFuncAddresses & | |
| 5699 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= N & | |
| 5700 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= N | |
| 5701 | |
| 5702 **Updates**:: | |
| 5703 | |
| 5704 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5705 | |
| 5706 **Examples**:: | |
| 5707 | |
| 5708 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5709 48:0| 3: <1, 3> | count 3; | |
| 5710 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
| 5711 52:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
| 5712 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (i32); | |
| 5713 59:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5714 ... | |
| 5715 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
| 5716 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5717 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5718 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
| 5719 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | i32: | |
| 5720 114:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
| 5721 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5722 | | %b0: | |
| 5723 120:0| 3: <44, 0, 2, 0, 1> | call void %p0(i32 %c0); | |
| 5724 125:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
| 5725 127:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5726 | |
| 5727 Indirect Function Call | |
| 5728 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
| 5729 | |
| 5730 The indirect function call calls a function using a value that is an indirect | |
| 5731 function address. It is different from the direct function call because we can't | |
| 5732 use the type signature of the corresponding literal function address to type | |
| 5733 check the construct. | |
| 5734 | |
| 5735 **Syntax**:: | |
| 5736 | |
| 5737 %vN = TAIL call RT V (T1 A1, ... , TM AM); <A> | |
| 5738 | |
| 5739 **Record**:: | |
| 5740 | |
| 5741 AA: <34, CC, RRT, VV, AA1, ... , AAM> | |
| 5742 | |
| 5743 **Semantics**: | |
| 5744 | |
| 5745 The indirect function call calls a function using a value ``V`` that is an | |
| 5746 indirect function address, and is assumed to return type ``RT``. The arguments | |
| 5747 ``A1`` through ``AM`` are passed in the order specified. The type of argument `` AI`` | |
| 5748 must be type ``TI`` (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is | |
| 5749 included, it must be the literal ``tail``. | |
| 5750 | |
| 5751 Each parameter type ``TI`` (1 <= I <= M), and return type ``RT``, must either be a | |
| 5752 primitive type, or a vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it | |
| 5753 must either be i32 or i64. | |
| 5754 | |
| 5755 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
| 5756 | |
| 5757 ====== == | |
| 5758 TAIL CC | |
| 5759 ====== == | |
| 5760 '' 0 | |
| 5761 'tail' 1 | |
| 5762 ====== == | |
| 5763 | |
| 5764 The type signature of the called function is assumed to be:: | |
| 5765 | |
| 5766 RT (T1, ... , TN) | |
| 5767 | |
| 5768 It isn't necessary to define this type in the :ref:`types | |
| 5769 block<link_for_types_block_section>`, since the type is inferred rather than | |
| 5770 used. | |
| 5771 | |
| 5772 **Constraints**:: | |
| 5773 | |
| 5774 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
| 5775 RRT = TypeID(RT) & | |
| 5776 VV = RelativeIndex(V) & | |
| 5777 M >= 0 & | |
| 5778 AbsoluteIndex(V) >= NumFcnAddresses & | |
| 5779 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5780 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
| 5781 IsFcnArgType(RT) & | |
| 5782 N == NumValuedInsts | |
| 5783 | |
| 5784 **Updates**:: | |
| 5785 | |
| 5786 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
| 5787 TypeOf(%vN) = RT; | |
| 5788 | |
| 5789 **Examples**:: | |
| 5790 | |
| 5791 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
| 5792 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
| 5793 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
| 5794 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
| 5795 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
| 5796 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2> | @t3 = i32 (i32, float, double); | |
| 5797 62:6| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1, 2> | @t4 = i32 (float, double); | |
| 5798 67:4| 3: <2> | @t5 = void; | |
| 5799 69:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5800 ... | |
| 5801 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
| 5802 | | i32 | |
| 5803 | | @f0(i32 %p0, float %p1, | |
| 5804 | | double %p2) { | |
| 5805 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
| 5806 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
| 5807 | | %b0: | |
| 5808 114:4| 3: <44, 0, 3, 0, 2, 1> | %v0 = call i32 | |
| 5809 | | %p0(float %p1, double %p2); | |
| 5810 120:6| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v0; | |
| 5811 123:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 .. _link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section: | |
| 5814 | |
| 5815 Memory Blocks and Alignment | |
| 5816 =========================== | |
| 5817 | |
| 5818 In general, variable and heap allocated data are represented as byte addressable | |
| 5819 memory blocks. Alignment is always a power of 2, and defines an expectation on | |
| 5820 the memory address. That is, an alignment is met if the memory address is | |
| 5821 (evenly) divisible by the alignment. Note that alignment of 0 is never allowed. | |
| 5822 | |
| 5823 Alignment plays a role at two points: | |
| 5824 | |
| 5825 * When you create a local/global variable | |
| 5826 | |
| 5827 * When you load/store data using a pointer. | |
| 5828 | |
| 5829 PNaClAsm allows most types to be placed at any address, and therefore can | |
| 5830 have alignment of 1. However, many architectures can load more efficiently | |
| 5831 if the data has an alignment that is larger than 1. As such, choosing a larger | |
| 5832 alignment can make load/stores more efficient. | |
| 5833 | |
| 5834 On loads and stores, the alignment in the instruction is used to communicate | |
| 5835 what assumptions the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` can | |
| 5836 make when choosing the appropriate machine instructions. If the alignment is 1, | |
| 5837 it can't assume anything about the memory address used by the instruction. When | |
| 5838 the alignment is greater than one, it can use that information to potentially | |
| 5839 chose a more efficient sequence of instructions to do the load/store. | |
| 5840 | |
| 5841 When laying out data within a variable, one also considers alignment. The reason | |
| 5842 for this is that if you want an address to be aligned, within the bytes defining | |
| 5843 the variable, you must choose an alignment for the variable that guarantees that | |
| 5844 alignment. | |
| 5845 | |
| 5846 In PNaClAsm, the valid load/store alignments are: | |
| 5847 | |
| 5848 =========== ============== | |
| 5849 Type Alignment | |
| 5850 =========== ============== | |
| 5851 i1 1 | |
| 5852 i8 1 | |
| 5853 i16 1 | |
| 5854 i32 1 | |
| 5855 i64 1 | |
| 5856 Float 1, 4 | |
| 5857 Double 1, 8 | |
| 5858 <4 x i1> not applicable | |
| 5859 <8 x i1> not applicable | |
| 5860 <16 x i1> not applicable | |
| 5861 <16 x i8> 1 | |
| 5862 <8 x i16> 2 | |
| 5863 <4 x i32> 4 | |
| 5864 <4 x float> 4 | |
| 5865 =========== ============== | |
| 5866 | |
| 5867 Note that only vectors do not have an alignment value of 1. Hence, they can't be | |
| 5868 placed at an arbitrary memory address. Also, since vectors on ``i1`` can't be | |
| 5869 loaded/stored, the alignment is not applicable for these types. | |
| 5870 | |
| 5871 .. _link_for_intrinsic_functions_section: | |
| 5872 | |
| 5873 Intrinsic Functions | |
| 5874 =================== | |
| 5875 | |
| 5876 Intrinsic functions are special in PNaClAsm. They are implemented as specially | |
| 5877 named (external) function calls. The purpose of these intrinsic functions is to | |
| 5878 extend the PNaClAsm instruction set with additional functionality that is | |
| 5879 architecture specific. Hence, they either can't be implemented within PNaClAsm, | |
| 5880 or a non-architecture specific implementation may be too slow on some | |
| 5881 architectures. In such cases, the :ref:`PNaCl | |
| 5882 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` must fill in the corresponding | |
| 5883 implementation, since only it knows the architecture it is compiling down to. | |
| 5884 | |
| 5885 Examples of intrinsic function calls are for concurrent operations, atomic | |
| 5886 operations, bulk memory moves, thread pointer operations, and long jumps. | |
| 5887 | |
| 5888 It should be noted that calls to intrinsic functions do not have the same | |
| 5889 calling type constraints as ordinary functions. That is, an intrinsic can use | |
| 5890 any integer type for arguments/results, unlike ordinary functions (which | |
| 5891 restrict integer types to ``i32`` and ``i64``). | |
| 5892 | |
| 5893 See the :doc:`PNaCl bitcode reference manual<pnacl-bitcode-abi>` for the full | |
| 5894 set of intrinsic functions allowed. Note that in PNaClAsm, all pointer types to | |
| 5895 an (LLVM) intrinsic function is converted to type i32. | |
| 5896 | |
| 5897 .. _link_for_support_functions_section: | |
| 5898 | |
| 5899 Support Functions | |
| 5900 ================= | |
| 5901 | |
| 5902 Defines functions used to convert syntactic representation to values in the | |
| 5903 corresponding record. | |
| 5904 | |
| 5905 SignRotate | |
| 5906 ---------- | |
| 5907 | |
| 5908 The SignRotate function encodes a signed integer in an easily compressible | |
| 5909 form. This is done by rotating the sign bit to the rightmost bit, rather than | |
| 5910 the leftmost bit. By doing this rotation, both small positive and negative | |
| 5911 integers are small (unsigned) integers. Therefore, all small integers can be | |
| 5912 encoded as a small (unsigned) integers. | |
| 5913 | |
| 5914 The definition of SignRotate(N) is: | |
| 5915 | |
| 5916 ======== ============= ========= | |
| 5917 Argument Value Condition | |
| 5918 ======== ============= ========= | |
| 5919 N abs(N)<<1 N >= 0 | |
| 5920 N abs(N)<<1 + 1 N < 0 | |
| 5921 ======== ============= ========= | |
| 5922 | |
| 5923 .. _link_for_absolute_index_section: | |
| 5924 | |
| 5925 AbsoluteIndex | |
| 5926 ------------- | |
| 5927 | |
| 5928 Bitcode IDs of the forms ``@fN``, ``@gN``, ``%pN``, ``%cN``, and ``%vN``, are | |
| 5929 combined into a single index space. This can be done because of the ordering | |
| 5930 imposed by PNaClAsm. All function address bitcode IDs must be defined before any | |
| 5931 of the other forms of bitcode IDs. All global address bitcode IDs must be | |
| 5932 defined before any local bitcode IDs. Within a function block, the parameter | |
| 5933 bitcode IDs must be defined before constant IDs, and constant IDs must be | |
| 5934 defined before instruction value IDs. | |
| 5935 | |
| 5936 Hence, within a function block, it is safe to refer to all of these | |
| 5937 bitcode IDs using a single *absolute* index. The absolute index for | |
| 5938 each kind of bitcode ID is computed as follows: | |
| 5939 | |
| 5940 ========== =================================================================== | |
| 5941 Bitcode ID AbsoluteIndex | |
| 5942 ========== =================================================================== | |
| 5943 @tN N | |
| 5944 @fN N | |
| 5945 @gN N + NumFcnAddresses | |
| 5946 @pN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses | |
| 5947 @cN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses + NumParams | |
| 5948 @vN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses + NumParams + NumFcnConsts | |
| 5949 ========== =================================================================== | |
| 5950 | |
| 5951 .. _link_for_relative_index: | |
| 5952 | |
| 5953 RelativeIndex | |
| 5954 ------------- | |
| 5955 | |
| 5956 Relative indices are used to refer to values within instructions of a function. | |
| 5957 The relative index of an ID is always defined in terms of the index associated | |
| 5958 with the next value generating instruction. It is defined as follows:: | |
| 5959 | |
| 5960 RelativeIndex(J) = AbsoluteIndex(%vN) - AbsoluteIndex(J) | |
| 5961 | |
| 5962 where:: | |
| 5963 | |
| 5964 N = NumValuedInsts | |
| 5965 | |
| 5966 AbbrevIndex | |
| 5967 ----------- | |
| 5968 | |
| 5969 This function converts user-defined abbreviation indices to the corresponding | |
| 5970 internal abbreviation index saved in the bitcode file. It adds 4 to its | |
| 5971 argument, since there are 4 predefined internal abbreviation indices (0, 1, 2, | |
| 5972 and 3). | |
| 5973 | |
| 5974 ========= ============== | |
| 5975 N AbbrevIndex(N) | |
| 5976 ========= ============== | |
| 5977 undefined 3 | |
| 5978 %aA A + 4 | |
| 5979 @aA A + 4 | |
| 5980 ========= ============== | |
| 5981 | |
| 5982 Log2 | |
| 5983 ---- | |
| 5984 | |
| 5985 This is the 32-bit log2 value of its argument. | |
| 5986 | |
| 5987 BitSizeOf | |
| 5988 --------- | |
| 5989 | |
| 5990 Returns the number of bits needed to represent its argument (a type). | |
| 5991 | |
| 5992 ======= ================ | |
| 5993 T BitSizeOf | |
| 5994 ======= ================ | |
| 5995 i1 1 | |
| 5996 i8 8 | |
| 5997 i16 16 | |
| 5998 i32 32 | |
| 5999 i64 64 | |
| 6000 float 32 | |
| 6001 double 64 | |
| 6002 <N X T> N * BitSizeOf(T) | |
| 6003 ======= ================ | |
| 6004 | |
| 6005 UnderlyingType | |
| 6006 -------------- | |
| 6007 | |
| 6008 Returns the primitive type of the type construct. For primitive types, the | |
| 6009 *UnderlyingType* is itself. For vector types, the base type of the vector is the | |
| 6010 underlying type. | |
| 6011 | |
| 6012 UnderlyingCount | |
| 6013 --------------- | |
| 6014 | |
| 6015 Returns the size of the vector if given a vector, and 0 for primitive types. | |
| 6016 Note that this function is used to check if two vectors are of the same size. | |
| 6017 It is also used to test if two types are either primitive (i.e. UnderlyingCount | |
| 6018 returns 0 for both types) or are vectors of the same size (i.e. UnderlyingCount | |
| 6019 returns the same non-zero value). | |
| 6020 | |
| 6021 IsInteger | |
| 6022 --------- | |
| 6023 | |
| 6024 Returns true if the argument is in {i1, i8, i16, i32, i64}. | |
| 6025 | |
| 6026 IsFloat | |
| 6027 ------- | |
| 6028 | |
| 6029 Returns true if the argument is in {``float``, ``double``}. | |
| 6030 | |
| 6031 IsVector | |
| 6032 -------- | |
| 6033 | |
| 6034 Returns true if the argument is a vector type. | |
| 6035 | |
| 6036 IsPrimitive | |
| 6037 ----------- | |
| 6038 | |
| 6039 Returns true if the argument is a primitive type. That is:: | |
| 6040 | |
| 6041 IsPrimitive(T) == IsInteger(T) or IsFloat(T) | |
| 6042 | |
| 6043 IsFcnArgType | |
| 6044 ------------ | |
| 6045 | |
| 6046 Returns true if the argument is a primitive type or a vector type. Further, | |
| 6047 if it is an integer type, it must be i32 or i64. That is:: | |
| 6048 | |
| 6049 IsFcnArgType(T) = (IsInteger(T) and (i32 = BitSizeOf(T) | |
| 6050 or i64 == BitSizeOf(T))) | |
| 6051 or IsFloat(T) or IsVector(T) | |
| 6052 | |
| 6053 .. _link_for_abbreviations_section: | |
| 6054 | |
| 6055 Abbreviations | |
| 6056 ============= | |
| 6057 | |
| 6058 Abbreviations are used to convert PNaCl records to a sequence of bits. PNaCl | |
| 6059 uses the same strategy as `LLVM's bitcode file format | |
| 6060 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_. See that document for more | |
| 6061 details. | |
| 6062 | |
| 6063 It should be noted that we replace LLVM's header (called the *Bitcode Wrapper | |
| 6064 Format*) with the bytes of the :ref:`PNaCl record | |
| 6065 header<link_for_header_record_section>`. In addition, PNaCl bitcode files do | |
| 6066 not allow *blob* abbreviation. | |
| 6067 | |
| 6068 .. _link_for_abbreviations_block_section: | |
| 6069 | |
| 6070 Abbreviations Block | |
| 6071 ------------------- | |
| 6072 | |
| 6073 The abbreviations block is the first block in the module build. The | |
| 6074 block is divided into sections. Each section is a sequence of records. Each | |
| 6075 record in the sequence defines a user-defined abbreviation. Each section | |
| 6076 defines abbreviations that can be applied to all (succeeding) blocks of a | |
| 6077 particular kind. These abbreviations are denoted by the (global) ID of the form | |
| 6078 *@aN*. | |
| 6079 | |
| 6080 In terms of `LLVM's bitcode file format | |
| 6081 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_, the abbreviations block is called a | |
| 6082 *BLOCKINFO* block. Records *SETBID* and *DEFINE_ABBREV* are the only records | |
| 6083 allowed in PNaCl's abbreviation block (i.e. it doesn't allow *BLOCKNAME* and | |
| 6084 *SETRECORDNAME* records). | |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 TODO | |
| 6087 ---- | |
| 6088 | |
| 6089 Extend this document to describe PNaCl's bitcode bit sequencer | |
| 6090 without requiring the reader to refer to `LLVM's bitcode file | |
| 6091 format <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_. | |
| OLD | NEW |